Home

2013 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

1. LU 700 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MMMmmm A Mileage or time passed o o o o e o o o 2 S S S S S N whichever comes first 9 8 8S 8 8 8 8 8 2 3 2 8 88 d Alale Bl a RI 8 8 9 r s 9 s Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 i E e e e e e e e N Or Kometo 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 E J S S S 82 8 38 EISSI AIS 3 Replace spark plugs X X X X X fed 5 7L engine ul Replace the ignition cables X id 4 7L Engine B f T Flush and replace the engine IM coolant at 10 years or 150 000 X X 29 miles 240 000 km whichever EE comes first 8 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your X vehicle for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing EE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 701 Il A Mileage or time passed o o eo e eo e o o e 2 E E whichever comes first 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 amp 8 2 3 8 82 828 L aja v aolo R o 9s 9 r s e9 sz 9 i Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o e o eo S 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 8 81818 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8f oe v 6 o o r Fl zz ele 2 amp 8 aL Change automatic transmission X S fluid and filter e Inspect the transfer case fluid H change for any of the following X E police taxi fleet or frequent 7 trailer towing L Change the transfer case fluid X E Inspect and replace PCV valve if X S necessary 8
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply 702 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N ie E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE sseeee ees 705 Impaired TDD TTY 000 707 Prepare For The Appointment 705 Service Contract essas reseni onp nera 707 Prepare A Dist sse cope a RR 705 B WARRANTY INFORMATION 708 Be Reasonable With Requests 705 B MOPAR PARTS 00004 709 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 705 Mi REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 709 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 706 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 6 0 2 ee 709 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 706 In Mexico contact ossa efle fy eme 707 I
3. Red Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F33 20 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater F38 30 Amp Power Inverter Yellow 1 If Equipped Pink 115V AC If Rear Blower If Equipped Equipped F39 30 Amp Vehicle System In F34 30 Amp Vehicle System In Pink terface Module 1 Pink terface Module 2 If Equipped If Equipped F41 10 Amp Active Grill Shutter F35 30 Amp Sunroof If Red Pink Equipped F42 20 Amp Horn F36 30 Amp Rear Defroster If Yellow Pink Equipped F43 10 Amp Snow Plow Left F37 30 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater Red If Equipped Pink 2 if equipped F44 10 Amp Diagnostic Port ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F46 10 Amp Tire Pressure Moni F53 20Amp Trailer Tow Left Red tor Yellow Turn Stop Lights F47 10 Amp Snow Plow Right F54 20 Amp Adjustable Pedals Red If Equipped Yellow F49 10 Amp Instrument Panel F55 20 Amp E38 Radio If Red Cluster Yellow Equipped F50 20 Amp Air Suspension F56 15Amp Additional Diesel Yellow Control Module If Blue Content If Equipped Equipped F51 10 Amp Ignition Node F57 20 Amp Transmission Red Module Keyless Yellow Ignition F52 5 Amp Battery Sensor Tan 674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car
4. 225 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 390 Electronic Brake Control System 470 Anti Lock Brake System 000 470 Brake Assist System 0 0 0 0 0000000 471 Traction Control System 2 0 6 0 2 471 Electronic Range Select ERS 0 0 361 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 180 Electronic Stability Control ESC iius 475 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 193 Emergency Brake 1 2 lille 467 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck Hazard Warning Flasher Jump Starting ias uses hk y Rc ee Ros d TOW HOOKS sc heehee m ren e eid Emission Control System Maintenance 718 INDEX ea BI SINGS acea ren Pace rem v Sate oae d 631 Air Cleaner leen 640 Block Heater 2 222222 bia d i 351 Break In Recommendations 119 Compartment 2 44e ase tae ERR eg 630 Compartment Identification 630 Coolant Antifreeze 0 2 0 2 0 eee 691 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0000000 121 Flooded Starting llle 345 Fuel Requirements 00000005 521 Jump Starting 6 6 a eee 612 DU Gass terete Gah vue Geanet eh eee A ae See ae 637 Oil Piller Cap i seen eae ac sx Cig eae d 639 Oil Selection 0 0 ee i 638 Oil Synthetic cesses eR E RE ERR 639 Overheating c eed e eee a px pepe os 571 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 76
5. System Malfunction 000 ll ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Key Ignition Park Interlock To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode 351 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 354 Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Egquippedk soudure omes area neds 354 Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1500 Modele Only srias sean n Rete 361 Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models Only ciu tm nnn 373 ll FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED 5 x pde emere ed mea 384 Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equippedis s cse heres 384 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped 0 0 388 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped 394 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped 398 E AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 406 Descriptions ere e wx e eer es oat d 406 Air Suspension Modes illus 410 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages osese rasa Dasuri a a 411 Operations ur RI e ds RR e sas 412 E AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM 2500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED i 1 25 43 ge eseds xar ce
6. sss 649 Coolant Capacity icd ek er RR ed 689 Coolant Level 42 2 ded REL EP deed 648 Disposal of Used Coolant 651 Drain Flush and Refill 0 648 INSPeCHON usua Ohad aeort has Gne e d a 651 Points to Remember 0 00000 653 Pressure Cap us indde wees aoow se need 650 Radiator Cap esee Re ea aaa ds 650 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 648 Corrosion Protection 2 0 0 00000 eee eee 661 Cupholder oi ieee ceed s na 214 Customer Assistance 0 0 eee 705 Data Recorder Event 0 0 000000 cee eee 83 ee INDEX 717 Daytime Running Lights 163 Dealer Service cerrar reami asee EERE 635 Defroster Rear Window llle 225 Defroster Windshield 0000005 122 Delay Intermittent Wipers lt secs ese t et iasseas 173 Differential Limited Slip 0 440 Disabled Vehicle Towing a setesi aans 623 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 651 Door LOCKS uerius RE X3 Gries 34 Door Locks Automatic sees 37 Driving Off Pavement sess r raaraa ak eee ee ee eee 421 OftR ad 4 13939 aae Rc Rp a Ke s 421 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water cuca 244006 ea 5 de aes ce eee Rud 442 Dual Rear Wheels 000000 ee eee 507 E 85 Fuel ic neu ee cae Ge Nene So GEC SG ea a 526 Electrical Power Outlets llle 208 Electric Rear Window Defrost
7. Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F08 40 Amp Emissions Diesel F12 40 Amp Body Controller 3 Green If Equipped Green Interior Lights F09 40 Amp Diesel Fuel Heater F13 40 Amp Blower Motor Green If Equipped Green F10 40 Amp Body Controller F14 40 Amp Body Controller 4 Green Exterior Lighting 2 Green Power Locks F10 50 Amp Body Controller F15 30 Amp Electric Park Brake Red Exterior Lighting 2 Pink Right Side If If Equipped with Equipped Stop Start F19 30 Amp SCR If Equipped F11 30 Amp Integrated Trailer Pink Pink Brake Module If F20 30 Amp Passenger Door Equipped Pink Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F21 30 Amp Drive Train Control F26 30 Amp Antilock Brakes Pink Module Pink Stability Control F22 20 Amp Engine Control Module Valves Yellow Module F28 20 Amp Trailer Tow Backup F23 30 Amp Body Controller 1 Yellow Lights If Pink Equipped F24 30 Amp Driver Door Mod F29 20 Amp Trailer Tow Parking Pink ule Yellow Lights If F25 30 Amp Front Wiper Low Equipped Pink Speed F30 30 Amp Trailer Tow Recep F25 30 Amp Front Wiper High Pink tacle Pink Speed F32 30 Amp Drive Train Control Pink Module If Equipped 672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
8. 0 0 354 Bulb Replacements cacas peresis creasa 678 Bulbs Light sus oer en ders 124 Cab Top Clearance Lights 686 Camera Re r llle 193 Camper 23 segue eai Ot d eade que acie aeo 245 Capacities Fluid 15s seit mes pane ke ga 689 Caps Filler Oil Engine ss crecimos seeriates s 639 Radiator Coolant Pressure 650 Carbon Monoxide Warning 716 INDEX ee Cargo Light aee bem x 9E eh ars 170 Car Washes si d es dro A ea RR Mae qus 662 Cellular Phone dedo b RR RR baw 314 Center High Mounted Stop Light 684 Center Seat Storage Compartment 219 Certification Label 1 0 0 0 000000 eee 532 Chart Dre Sizing iss base er ee ee 483 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 257 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety i i 120 Checks Safety is es ex aee ER ER ae bd 120 Child Restraint 5 2 Resa zu Rea dk RE bon 84 Cigar Lighter i e o rmn 212 Clean Air Gasoline 46 49 6444 ae Ue A are a 522 Cleaning Wheels e pya 45004440 24 rut x enne an ee 664 Climate Control 0 0 0 0 llle 314 Cold Weather Operation 2004 345 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 313 Compact Spare TITE see reac taangata a a ee eae ane 498 Console Overhead lees 194 Contract Service sce 707 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 650 Cooling System RR S RR Rm 647 Adding Coolant Antifreeze
9. 00000 Replacement Bulbs Replacement Keys Replacement Parts 1 6 0 0 00 e eee eee Replacement Tires caca cxi E em ot a Reporting Safety Defects 726 INDEX ae Restraint Head 6 0 0 ce ees 154 Restraints Child 2 0 0 eeren iaaea iiaa ken 84 Restraints Occupant eese sos eru recse e d 47 Rotation Tires secman aama samaa aoa aa ae Eaa 506 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle LL 122 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 124 Safety Defects Reporting llle 709 Safety Exhaust Gas llle ss 121 Safety Information Tire reseca senp i eeen 482 Safety IPs i ese e in tea ha ed daas ee ates 120 Schedule Maintenance n n nananana aae 696 Seat Belt Maintenance n lille 666 Seat Belt Reminder llle 64 Seat B liS cie ee me eH ge eee hae 47 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 59 And Pregnant Women 0 0 000002005 65 Child Restraint s sses 2 4a ctw ath RP 84 Extender Front Seat iie e ace e Bo e ea e D 51 InSpectiOmn ias anges x RR MAE REOR ka ares 122 Pretensjofiers lt scs c bee de pat RES han ren 63 Reminder edu date eddy tO RE ere 261 Untwisting Procedure 00004 59 ri D cra Hr eres Mae eae 140 Adjustment e ete sead ped huh OER Gh s 140 Folding Floors sereus teeri pius semet 227 Memory di Ee RUE ek e CHR AE qs 156 POWED sporre rotert atr RR CE RUE E PIER 141 Rear Folding i e mecs 151 Reclining Re t 2c 030002 ee
10. en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e ry The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a
11. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 t 135 s 020207436 020271227 Emergency Key Removal WIN Emergency Key Removal Keyless Enter N Go Fob KIN NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION e If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead your Key Fob will become locked in the ignition Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob whi
12. 62 SAEU CTOIOSHOREHEIQUI DOGS este aa peint d Seat Belt Pretensioners scoite assy 62 E KEYLESS ENTER N GO 0 38 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Child Restraints 249 ee te x CIS 84 Belt AlertB iuret RR an RE Rd 63 E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 118 TEUPUSISADIHEISEQOUI WOR spuecseeub ut OF SAFETY TIPS na ocdsacasagesaacasceass 1 p Seay DEW EXMISDUBN ae ae prenimp tae es Transporting Passengers llle 119 eae DAD d 7 MEET 65 Exhaust Gas l l eee 120 Air Bag System Components sisse 6 RN M E 67 Q Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 71 The Vehicle 0 00 eee aitas 123 Event Data Recorder EDR 83 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an Ignition Node Module IGNM with integral ignition switch You can insert the Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code
13. If Equipped 131 Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display If Equipped 132 Outside Mirrors 0 0000 000 08 133 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 134 O Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped stea sera EN ens gears ane 135 Power Mirrors If Equipped 135 Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped 137 Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor If Eg pped a suede s ERS oad ene eae 138 Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped 139 DEALS zudem tete be A 140 Driver s Power Seat If Equipped 140 Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped 142 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Lumbar If Equipped 143 B LIGHTS ucc sack ek XC Re CS e ces 160 Heated Seats If Equipped 143 Headlights icc sed ee 161 Ventilated Seats If Equipped 146 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 161 Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped 147 Headlights On With Wipers Available With 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped 148 Automatic Headlights Only 162 Mega Cab Rear Seat Features 148 a ake cua EM 162 Head Restraints 000 153 Headlight Del
14. be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a tion to the ON RUN position and also press the number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go if equipped in the ACC or ON RUN position A The following indicators should be used to ensure that child could operate power windows other controls you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position or move the vehicle e When shifting into PARK pull the column mounted shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops For console mounted shifter move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops 368 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated WARNING in the PARK gate Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever or road conditions You might lose control of the will not move out of PARK
15. 0000 641 Maintenance Procedures 0 0000 eee 636 Maintenance Schedule 0 0000000 696 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 634 Manual Service maera naa ae aaa Eaa 710 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check 0000000000 658 Lubricant Selection llle 692 Memory Seat csse see e e E i 156 Methanol llle 522 MITOS 3 224 cestkRh ug Gb X EC E eden dn es 131 Electric Powered 0 00 cece eee eee 136 Heated ucc RO a eh wa 137 MOMOFY uu emp hace ei aieia Re ee ee 156 uiri C ails ware dei alk Baw adean a Bae bee 133 RearvieW 2 4 4 4 46 x baro ees 131 Trailer TOWING coii egia Wisk dee o ree kik owes 139 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 508 Mopar PariS lt e ciem ee ae eoe Chae dag 635 MTBEZEIBE zeugen 522 Multi Function Control Lever 171 Navigation System Uconnect gps 193 New Vehicle Break In Period 119 Occupant Restraints 00000000008 47 Occupant Restraints Sedan 00 4 69 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 521 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 421 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 421 Oil ENGIN cs baa ae seas Meee aie as ed Capacity stad oh pee eee awa oa Ge ecl i Change Interval 724 INDEX eee Dipstek ui dr ee em eode oed 637 Disposal itk
16. 060505399 Oiling Location Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference the larger tire should be installed in a front location The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows 060505400 Tightening Pattern 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611 second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specifications at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torqu
17. 2 834 kg Max Payload 1 900 Ibs 861 kg 542 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Max Payload 1 480 Ibs 671 kg Max Payload 1 450 Ibs 657 kg ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 4 7L V 8 Standard Towing Standard Towing 6 Speed 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg Automatic Max Towing 7 500 Ibs Max Towing 7 450 Ibs Transmission 8 401 kg 8 379 kg Max Payload 1 570 Ibs 712 kg Max Payload 1 530 lbs 694 kg 5 7L HEMI Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs Standard Towing V 8 6 Speed 2 268 kg 2 268 kg 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Automatic Max Towing 10 350 Ibs Max Towing 10 300 Ibs Max Towing 10 050 Ibs Transmission 4 694 kg 4 672 kg 4 558 kg Max Payload 1 380 Ibs 625 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 543 Ram 2500 And 3500 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 5 7L HEMI Max Towing 10 100 Ibs Max Towing 12 300 Ibs V 8 6 Speed 4 581 kg 5 579 kg Automatic Max Payload 1 780 Ibs 807 kg Max Payload 3 120 lbs Transmission 1 415 kg NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www ramtrucks com http www ramtruck ca Canada 544 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle L
18. EVIC A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph N 040971462 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful e Vehicle Settings Not Equipped with a Uconnect information by pressing the switches mounted on the Access 5 0 amp 8 4 radio steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following The system allows the driver to select information by Digital Speedometer pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering e Vehicle Info WEGE Fuel Economy Info e Trip A e Trip B e Stop Start Info If Equipped Trailer Tow e Audio e e Stored Messages 040971549 e Scien peup EVIC Steering Wheels Buttons e UP Arrow Button A Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and sub menus Fuel Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up e DOWN Arrow Button V Press and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and sub menus Fu
19. changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHAN NEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps iL 2 Turn the igniti
20. Stop Start Req d Fault Detected If Equipped Stop Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open If Equipped Stop Start Unavailable Service Battery If Equipped Stop Start Unavailable Service Stop Start System If Equipped e Stop Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park If Equipped e Stop Start Off If Equipped e Autostop Duration If Equipped The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC Amber Telltales This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include Low Fuel Telltale M When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator Se oe iv This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind shield washer fluid is low e Low Coolant Level Indicator m This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low e Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale This telltale indicates that the transmission E fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this telltale turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEU TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off e Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale
21. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert wa
22. To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 3 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103 4 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direct
23. ZU ES EVE RAM TRUCK 2013 500 2500 3500 OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci dents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your per ceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or im provements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufac tured Copyright 2012 Chrysler Group LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONT
24. carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks Only Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Use MOPAR Type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate 644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPARQ Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cl
25. e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Access User s Manual Air Suspension If Equipped After pressing the Suspension soft key the following settings will be available e Sound Horn with Remote Lower When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER but ton is pressed Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Flash Lights with Remote Lower When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed twice This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lower feature selected Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Suspension Display Messages When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warnings Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed e Automatic Aero Mode When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed Touch the box
26. 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may Continued 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury or death NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear w
27. 4 Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp Customer selectable 5 Off Road 1 Indicator Lamp Customer selectable 6 Otf Road 2 Indicator Lamp Customer selectable NOTE The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 100 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h e Normal Ride Height NRH This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 e e Off Road 1 OR1 Raises the vehicle approximately 1 in 26 mm This position should be the primary position for all off road driving until Off Road 2 OR2 is needed A smoother and more comfortable ride will result To enter OR1 press the Up button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 35 mph 56 km h When in the OR1 position if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph 64 km h and 50 mph 80 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph 80 km h the vehicle will be automatically lowered to NRH Off Road 1 may not be available due to vehicle payload an EVIC message will be displayed when this occurs Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Off Road 2 OR2 Raises the vehicle approximately 2 in 51 mm This position is intended for
28. 480 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also oe flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previ
29. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 536 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be more than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling If equipped the electronic Trailer Sway Control TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are
30. Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition Refer to Supple mental Tire Pressure Information in Starting and Op erating for further information The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least ee STARTING AND OPERATING 495 once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the t
31. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go if equipped in the ACC or The following indicators should be used to ensure that ON RUN position A child could operate power you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position windows other controls or move the vehicle e When shifting into PARK pull the shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate 380 STARTING AND OPERATING i Look at the shift lever position display and verify that WARNING mu Ha WARNING it indicates the PARK position NING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic REVERSE or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop CAUTION NEUTRAL Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any oth
32. Entry System Illuminated 0 22 Ethatiol s 2 tages ae Sao ate wala a ran karat dnd cad 522 Event Data Recorder 4222s iss oe nn 83 Exhaust Gas Caution llli 121 Exhaust Systems ied edd dena RR EY 121 Exterior Lighting ies e eR anaa RR OR ee 162 Exterior Lights 4e ee doe eere 124 Filters Air Cleaner o ice aceseeerbr miegie d 640 Engine OW eee Gd Oe Oe oS eben gud 640 Engine Oil Disposal 005 639 Flashers Tam Signal 4 6 30h oe eee See ae oe Y RS 124 Flat Tire Stowage aiea a na AE eee 585 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range a cs eph ERR ERERS 529 Engine Oil 4 354 ese 4 eese a eg ms 528 Fuel Requirements ss iss sk ec nes Ren 526 Maintenance eed cc ced aes ed ep eias 529 Replacement Parts sa crand llle 529 en INDEX 719 SLaFUnig ei aoe eV x emis a a aeia te d 528 Flooded Engine Starting llle 345 Fluid Brake 23 08 a OF hd dale eed deed 692 Fluid Capacities lt fata custo nee Cte Oh 689 Fd Leaks iu ueterem ROPA odie Eb Yes 124 Fluid Level Checks Brake iei pua PU ud suut wd Ronan d 654 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 691 For Lights ducite ere ee CRT RA 166 Fold Flat Load Floor 0 000000 05 227 Four Way Hazard Flasher 571 Four Wheel Drive 000 00 ee eee 386 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 0 0 2 0 0 002005 616 Front Axle Differential 00 656 Fuel c40 5 pede
33. Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel 4WD 4WD LOCK LOW 2WD E x NEUTRAL 051905705 Transfer Case Switch Four Position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accom plished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure in this section for specific shifting instructions The WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road sur faces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the WD Control S
34. Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Before programming your RKE transmitters you must select the Remote Linked to Memory feature through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 NOTE If a memory profile has not already been set refer to Programming The Memory Feature for instruc tions on how to set a memory profile 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch
35. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized e dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of yo
36. Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted Too Cold Remote Start Aborted Door Open Remote Start Aborted Hood Open Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open Remote Start Aborted Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset Service Airbag System Service Airbag Warning Light Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled Front Seatbelts Unbuckled E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Door Open Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling Doors Open Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On Gear Not Available e Washer Fluid Low e Shift Not Allowed e Service Air Suspension System Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse e Normal Ride Height Achieved e Autostick Unavailable Service Required e Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved Entry Exit Ride Height Achieved Selected Ride Height Not Permitted e e Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake Trans Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Transmission Cool Ready to Drive Trailer Brake Disconnected e Service Air Suspension System Immediately Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height Service Transmission e e Service Shifter e Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss e e e e e Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door O
37. S 8 696 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by refer ring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the ti
38. SEEMING aues es dex e RECS dre e d ER d 465 ee INDEX 725 SUNOD cuu dez teet hee a tei Redes ace gs 205 WIDOWS sieaa ea a sells aa E ets pie Graal dnd 44 Power Steering Fluid seii 226 d 692 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 65 Pretensioners Seat Belts sce ues tg deste dud 63 Programmable Electronic Features 285 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 23 Radial Ply TES vosseierestaeebiu4 Seeded a 496 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 648 Radio Operation 0 2 llle 314 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 0 175 Ramp Travel Index 2 0 0 0000 eee eee 422 Rear Axle Differential 656 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails 243 Rear Park Sense System sabret asoa ker maas 184 Rear Seat Folding e eek ehe ne eem s 151 Rear Window Features llle 225 Rear Window Sliding ecc cesa simac saisie seias 227 Reclining Rear S fS pes rake se ee d erg 150 Recorder Event Data 22i lg 83 Recreational Towing llle 561 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 564 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 567 Reformulated Gasoline llle 522 Refrigerant p dex a pi ue dur eq md 643 Reminder Seat Belt sse sees 64 Remote Control Starting System suaire ruir Ekis RI dere 31 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 00 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls Remote Starting System
39. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 press the right hand Off Road stabilizer sway bar button to obtain the Off Road position The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to the On Road mode press the left hand On Road stabilizer sway bar button WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to On Road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury or death Contact your local service center for assistance SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER WAGON ONLY Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics Your vehicle has excellent on and off road capabilities These off road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation Before you venture out you should contact your local governmental 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ME
40. memory position 2 The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion 031105757 Memory Seat Buttons Programming The Memory Feature NOTE To create a new memory profile perform the following Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences seat side mirrors adjustable pedals and radio station presets 3 Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Insertthe ignition key fob and turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 m Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets ise Press and release the S Set button on the memory switch p Within five seconds press and release either of the memory buttons 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display which memory position has been set NOTE
41. straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt alone instead of the LATCH an chorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be re moved No THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Locating The LATCH Ancho
42. then press and release button 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by following steps 1 4 above and press ing the UNLOCK button instead of LOCK on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Driver One Memory Position Recall To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 Driver Two Memory Position Recall To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch press MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s
43. turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque con verter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Six Speed Transmission It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature 170 180 F 77 82 C This normally occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of IJ driving At normal operating temperature the fluid can not be held comfortably between the fingertips You can read the transmission sump temperature in the EVIC display see Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information 660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Use the following
44. will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant ant
45. 15 Amp Switch Bank Red Module Electric Blue Instrument Cluster Power Steering F85 10Amp Airbag Module F79 15 Amp Clearance Lights Red Blue F86 10 Amp Airbag Module F80 10 Amp Universal Garage Red Red Door Opener F87 10 Amp Air Suspension Compass Red Trailer Tow Steer F81 20 Amp Trailer Tow Right ing Column Con Yellow Turn Stop Lights trol Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F88 15 Amp Instrument Panel F97 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats Blue Cluster Natural amp Heated Steering F90 F91 20 Amp Power Outlet Rear Wheel If Yellow seats Customer Equipped Selectable F98 25 Amp Front Heated Seats F93 20 Amp Cigar Lighter Natural If Equipped Yellow F99 10 Amp Climate Control F94 10Amp Shifter Transfer Red Red Case Module F101 15 Amp Electrochromatic F95 10 Amp Rear Camera Blue Mirror Smart Red Park Assist High Beams If F96 10 Amp Rear Seat Heater FQEppen Red Switch F104 20Amp Power Outlets In Yellow strument Panel Center Console 678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the e When installing the power distribution center cover air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi in the
46. 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only 467 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 467 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 467 Traction Control System TCS If Equipped 468 Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped 469 Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped 469 Electronic Stability Control ESC It Equipped sedaestesseueca s epe dis 473 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped 478 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 479 Tire Markings s Rer RR CSS 479 Tire Identification Number TIN 483 Tire Terminology And Definitions 484 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 485 TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 490 Tire Pressure 422249 Rer s 490 Tire Inflation Pressures 491 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 493 Radial Ply Tires 00 0 493 All Season Tires If Equipped 493 Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped 494 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 SNOW ires v inei x em eee eene ee 494 Directional Tires If Equipped 504 Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 504 Wheel If Equipped 00 0 495 lI TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR S
47. 485 EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry this tire Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for ram Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four
48. 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 529 range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in
49. 523 CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on poor engine performance poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer change the engine oil and oil filter disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline 524 STARTING AND OPERATING ME blended with MMT provides no performance adv
50. Aborted Fuel Low e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 To Enter Remote Start Mode For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is Press and release the REMOTE START button JEDE Remote Start mode O on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec e The engine can be started two consecutive times two onds The parking lights will flash vehicle 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However doors will lock and the horn will chirp twice if the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine position before you can repeat the start sequence for a will run for 15 minutes third cycle NOTE To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle f your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds NO
51. Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function and oper ating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is sel
52. BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of BAS you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 472 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation HSA will activ
53. DRIVE or in some cases only by a KEY START The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a SHIFT OUT OF PARK message or a STOP START KEY START RE QUIRED message to indicate which action is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop System 2 1 Press the STOP START Off switch located on the switch bank The light on the switch will illuminate STOP START OFF Switch The STOP START OFF message will appear in Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At the next vehicle stop after turning off the STOP START system the engine will not be stopped If the STOP START system is manually turned off the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch The STOP START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the key is turned off and back on To Manually Turn On The Start Stop System 1 Press the STOP START Off switch located on the switch bank E STARTING AND OPERATING 351 2 The light on the switch will turn off System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the STOP START system the system will not shut down the engine A SERVICE STOP START SYSTEM messa
54. If Equipped 1 Press the 9 1 1 Call button b on the Rearview Mirror NOTE In case the 9 1 1 Call button is pushed in error there will be a 10 second delay before the 9 1 1 Call system initiates a call to a 9 1 1 operator To cancel the 9 1 1 Call connection press the 9 1 1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen Termination of the 9 1 1 Call will turn the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off 2 The LED light located between the Assist and 9 1 1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9 1 1 operator has been made THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 3 Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9 1 1 operator is made the 9 1 1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9 1 1 operator indication that the occupant placed a 9 1 1 Call the vehicle brand and the last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle 4 You should be able to speak with the 9 1 1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed NOTE Once a connection is made between the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system and the 9 1 1 operator the 9 1 1 opera tor may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed Once the 9 1 1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle s 9 1 1 Call system the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants
55. Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob NOTE Keyed Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC when the driver door is open Keyless Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN when the driver door is open If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the EVIC will display Key In Ignition SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine NOTE A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for thr
56. MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil 5 7L Engine For 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 6395 Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR brand Engine Oil Filters Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm 692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Up per Bank Gap 0 040 in 1 mm We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Lower Bank Gap 0 051 in 1 30 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L and 4 7L Engines 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Eight Speed Automatic We recommend you use MOPAR ZF 8 amp 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission Six Speed Automat
57. OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e SmartBeam can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performa
58. ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement op erate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection 4 Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only If Equipped Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex pectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly
59. REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing out TS am AP Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the lug wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Placement of the jack 600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location For 2500 and 3500 4x2 series trucks when changing a front wheel place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench The tube extensi
60. Radio If Equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Entry Exit Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 2 in 51 mm This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo To enter Entry Exit Mode press the Down button once from the NHR while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph 53 km h Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph 24 km h the vehicle height will begin to lower If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph 24 km h and 25 mph 40 km h for greater than 60 seconds or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the Entry Exit change will be cancelled To return to Normal Height Mode press the Up button once while in Entry Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph 24 km h Entry Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload an EVIC message will be displayed when this occurs Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 NOTE Entry Exit mode may be achieved using your key fob for easier entry loading Refer to A Word About Your Keys in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information e When in ENTRY EXIT set
61. Ratings The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to a 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Ram 1500 4x2 Max Payload 1 750 Ibs 793 kg Max Payload 1 720 Ibs 780 kg ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 3 6L V 6 Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 8 Speed 2 268 kg 2 268 kg Automatic Max Towing 6 500 Ibs Max Towing 6 500 Ibs Transmission 2 948 kg 2 948 kg Max Payload 1 910 Ibs 866 kg Max Payload 1 890 Ibs 857 kg 4 7L V 8 Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 6 Speed 2 268 kg 2 268 kg Automatic Max Towing 7 700 Ibs Max Towing 7 700 lbs Transmission 3 492 kg 3 492 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 541 Max Payload 1 710 Ibs 775 kg Max Payload 1 690 Ibs 766 kg ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 5 7L HEMI Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs Standard Towing V 8 6 Speed 2 268 kg 2 268 kg 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Automatic Max Towing 10 450 Ibs Max Towing 10 450 Ibs Max Towing 10 300 lbs Transmission 4 740 kg 4 740 kg 4 672 kg Max Payload 1 550 Ibs 703 kg Ram 1500 4x4 ST SLT Outdoorsman Sport Laramie 3 6L V 6 8 Speed Automatic Transmission Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 6 300 Ibs 2 857 kg Max Payload 1 930 Ibs 875 kg Standard Towing 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Max Towing 6 250 Ibs
62. Remote Keyless Entry Front Courtesy Reading Lights 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 031406003 Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 C97 ow oW 033906001 HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink amp Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position an
63. Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors the tailgate and the RamBox if equipped The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its pre
64. Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gears normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically STARTING AND OPERATING 383 shifting between all available gears Tapping the ERS switch will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping ERS or will change the top available gear 051205603 Column Shift Lever 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the ERS switch until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the ERS switch down The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission inc
65. Select ERS switches refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may
66. Storage Bin And Latch Opened Storage Bin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Seatback Storage Storage Regular Cab Located in the back of both the driver and passenger The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs front seats are pockets that can be used for storage the length of the cab Drivers Side Seatback Storage Storage Bin 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Always lift the storage compartment lids by using Storage and Seats Crew Cab The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats Lift the seats to access the storage com partment To open the storage compartments lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid 035205817 Crew Cab Storage the handle Failure to lift the lids by using the handle can result in damage to the lids Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat Grocery Bag Hooks UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster ste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster autom
67. Trailer and Tongue Weight 544 Wiring aloe ca steps eredi EE E EERE E nna dd 553 Trailer Towing Guide 0 0000005 540 Trailer Weight ps reso amas ea Dae RR oed 540 Transfer Case x cv deese Gun bae ee eh d 658 Electronically Shifted llle 390 Elda detur E Ge ee PER ed 692 Transmission llle 355 Automatic sos diia ead eee eee P RE eee oY 355 Fluid 4 siu aot ba sid ahaa Mord e e d 692 Maintenarice i e ex gx ee ee 658 Shiftng serere srry ERR t AS 352 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 30 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 23 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Tread Wear Indicators llle 500 Turm SIGNALS ages eee oce Rhen eade s 171 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 730 INDEX eee Unleaded Gasoline 000 0 040 521 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 59 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area n n anaana 243 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading pe ase kr err bei 489 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage xke ese sete ee rais 332 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 257 Warnings and Cautions lle 6 Warranty Information sss cessi llis 708 Washers Windshield iile 173 Washing Vehicle cocoa cere cee 662 Water Driving Through 2 2 0 0 0 0 imenih 442 Wheel and Wheel Trim 00 0
68. U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Access System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the soft and hard keys when either button is selected Push either soft or CED hard key a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if these modes are selected Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehic
69. Wheel Trim Care Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and Equipped chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion ner e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR Wheel Cleaner with a clean dry towel CAUTION e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue equivalent is recommended n Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665 Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended
70. a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
71. a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 617 CAUTION WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive even failure of the axle and tires A tire could train damage may result explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for may lead to transmission overheating and failure longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans a spinning wheel no matter what the speed mission shifting occurring 618 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for NOTE For off road
72. aS switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock all doors 021871225 Press The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT grab the door handle when pressing the door handle lock button This could unlock the door s THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This 2 is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RK
73. added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited Slip Differential 2500 3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive friction modifiers 658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ ential the Limited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill Transfer Case Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659 CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac
74. adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de scribed earlier in this manual CAUTION The Lamp Out indicator could illuminate if exte rior lamps are not properly installed Before Plowing Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness ee STARTING AND OPERATING 559 Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear The cutting edge should be 1 4 to 1 2 in 6 cm to 1 2 cm above ground in snow plowing position Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func tioning properly Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit www ramtrucks com or refer to the current Body Build ers Guide 1 The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two 2 The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded 3 Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers etc The loaded vehicle weight including the snowplow system all aftermarket accessories driver passengers options and cargo must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight GVWR or Gross Axle Weight GAWR ratings These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certifica tion Label on the driver s side door opening NOTE Detach the snowplow when transporting pas sengers Vehicle front end
75. agency to determine the designated off road vehicle ORV trails or recreation areas You should always tread lightly and only use established roads trails or ORV recreational areas The National Forest Service Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Re sources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails Skid Plates And Underbody Protection Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck including the fuel tank transfer case and steering damper In addition this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore aft rails This addi tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off road situations that would be considered im passable by a normal truck Ramp Travel Index RTI The ramp travel index is the distance in inches that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20 degree ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground This distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1 000 is the RTI This vehicle has an RTI of 655 which means you can articulate one front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground Water Fording Characteristics Water fording characteristic is the vehicle s ability to cross a body of still water where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the abilit
76. allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Checking Coolant Level With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on the dipstick 652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE To check the coolant level 1 Open the coolant reservoir S 3 Check the coolant level on the dipstick The radiator normally remains completely full so there is 2 Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for neck engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653 of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examin
77. allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped 9 Stage Planetary Gear Set Provides balance between speed and pulling power Wire Rope The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force 6 Clutch Lever The clutch lever allows the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand Remote Control The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in out and stop the winch To operate the winch the toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to power the winch out The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral center position CAUTION If not installed the hook strap must be placed on the hook Fairlead The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope Winch Accessories The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors change direction of pull and for safe winching 054000967 Gloves Wire rope through use will develop barbs which can slice skin It is ex tremely important to wear protective gloves while oper ating the winch or handling the wire rope Avoid loose fit
78. and hear 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee sounds occurring in the vehicle The vehicle s 9 1 1 Call WARNING Continued system will attempt to remain connected with the 9 1 1 operator until the 9 1 1 operator terminates the connec The 9 1 1 Call system is embedded into the vehi tion cle s electrical system Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle s electrical sys 5 The 9 1 1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate tem This may prevent your vehicle from sending a emergency responders and provide them with impor signal to initiate an emergency call To avoid inter tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates ference that can cause the 9 1 1 Call system to fail never add aftermarket equipment e g two way mobile radio CB radio data recorder etc to your vehicle s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle Modifications to any part of the 9 1 1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you WARNING e If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger e g fire or smoke is visible dangerous road conditions or location do not wait for voice contact from a 9 1 1 operator All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 9 1 1 Call System Limitations Vehicl
79. and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 4 iO Iglo i ED m I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii t p i i i i du E Y O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw EI i Nc CO t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie ima la im TI i i i i i i i
80. and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y mn M i shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Continued 494 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consump tion Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride
81. animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using ParkSense it is strongly recom mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 PARKVIEWG REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed in the rearview mirror if equipped or Uconnect amp screen if equipped along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear
82. builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On Or Off With Uconnect 5 0 1 Press the Settings button 2 Press the Safety amp Assistance soft key 3 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable Turning ParkView amp On Or Off With Uconnect amp 8 4A 8 4AN 1 Press the Settings soft key 2 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 3 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console is located on the headliner above the review mirror The overhead console contains the following features e Courtesy Reading Lights Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped Power Sliding Rear Window Switch If Equipped e Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens Lr 033371115 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights 031471116 Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the
83. can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain Sensing feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C Transmission In NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle spe
84. complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips EE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 711 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and
85. digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 mEmmEE STARTING AND OPERATING 487 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s lo
86. disengage Freespooling conserves battery power 054000973 Hook Strap 5 Pull the wire to the anchor point Pull out enough wire rope to reach your anchor point Be sure to keep a Free Spool certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become 4 Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap Free twisted and over wrapped when slackened leading to the winch hook from its anchor point Attach the hook wire rope damage To prevent losing the end hold the strap to the hook if not attached hook strap while you work STARTING AND OPERATING 455 054000974 054000975 6 Secure to the anchor point Once you have established Tree Trunk Protector your anchor point secure the tree trunk protector or choker chain around the object CSITIONNI Always be certain the anchor you select will with stand the load 456 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE How to choose an anchor point A secure anchor is critical to winching operations An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching Natural anchors include trees stumps and rocks Hook the cable as low as possible If no natural anchors are available when recov ering another vehicle your vehicle becomes the anchor point In this case be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving Ideally you ll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move This
87. door opening Use an accurate tire gauge to check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this updated pressure information After all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures press the tire light load inflation switch If the tire light load inflation switch s amber colored LED turns ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds A text message Tire Pres sure System Light Load Setting will also be displayed in the EVIC If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED flashes on and off for 10 seconds after all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures the pressure in any one of the four tires may not be at the light load inflation pressure cold values as 520 STARTING AND OPERATING ME indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear face of the driver door A text message Cannot Enter Light Load Setting Please Adjust Tire Pressure text message will also be displayed in the EVIC Using an accurate tire pressure gauge re check the tire pressures for the light load inflation pressure cold value WARNING It is the driver s responsibility to change to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold condition when not d
88. e Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL N button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL N button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 567 A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Press and hold the brake pedal 4 Start the engine Shift the transmission into NEU TRAL Depress the clutch pedal on a manual trans mussion e With manual shift transfer case shift the transfer case lever to the desired position e With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector switch press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL N button until the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off After
89. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel housings Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box There are four tie down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs 450 kg total RAMBOX IF EQUIPPED The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage and cargo management system consisting of three features Integrated box side storage bins e Cargo extender divider Bed rail tie down system RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup box The cargo storage bins provide watertight lockable illuminated storage for up to 150 Ibs 68 kg for 1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs 136 kg for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles of evenly distributed cargo Qv 7 J J 036705543 RamBox Cargo Storage Bins 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is properly secured Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 Ib 68 kg 1500 series vehicles or 300 Ibs 136 kg for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles per bin To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked press and release the button located on
90. equipped with a Tri Fold Tonneau Cover which consists of different features e Easy Tri Fold cover e Tonneau fore aft locator e Crosscar inside bed locator Front and rear clamps e Stowage strap Locking Capability NOTE The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured at the front of the box without removing completely Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Removal To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps 1 Lower the tailgate 2 Pull down on the clamp on both driver and passenger sides 3 Pick up on the cover and fold it back into the second panel 4 Be sure both clamps are pushed completely down 5 Pick up on the cover and fold it back into the third panel 6 Once in the third panel position pull down on the clamp on both sides 7 Besure to clip both straps together to insure the cover stays together 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 8 With two people remove the cover 036774432 Semi Clamped Position Clamped Position NOTE If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 Released Position Stowage Strap NOTE Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely before removing 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And Cleaning Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and push the Cover forward against the front of the truck bed The Tonneau Cover centers itself when
91. for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses 666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces shoul
92. found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire or original equipment vehicle dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 503 WARNING WARNING Continued Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure ani loss Ore ele control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use e jns km Be with load ratings SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATIO
93. front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Mode 045671421 gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode e E Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side win dow demist outlets Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in UD 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cold
94. gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range
95. heated steering wheel to operate On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column 031605590 Adjustable Pedals Switch The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad REUNION justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving NOTE You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked e Always adjust the pedals to a position that al
96. important that may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixi
97. in the glove box the Rear Camera If Equipped in this section to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the teminiai de Tot corrode 2 Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot 6 Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the forward facing surface of the tailgate This will pre vent damaging the connector and bracket when stor ing or reinstalling the tailgate NOTE Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support cables 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mM 6 Remove the tailgate from the vehicle NOTE Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks Locking Tang Locking Tailgate 3 Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle The lock is located next to the tailgate handle The 4 Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking pivot clears the hanger bracket the truck with the key fob if equipped with remote keyl try 5 Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side iE pivot ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 TRI FOLD TONNEAU COVER IF EQUIPPED Tri Fold Tonneau Cover If Equipped Your vehicle may be
98. is selected the Ride Height will auto matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Tire Jack Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Transport Mode If Equipped When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 Wheel Alignment Mode If Equipped Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information Horn with Remote Lower If Equipped When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER but ton is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next t
99. it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the con ditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan gerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 477 ESC Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than TCS would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the
100. it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105 Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022670220 sani E Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Standard Cab 106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Quad Cab Crew Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front pas
101. limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ME During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct
102. load wire rope is in tension or wire rope drum is moving e Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep others away during winching Continued e Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire rope hook and fairlead opening during operation and when spooling Never wrap wire rope back onto itself Always use a choker chain wire choker rope or tree trunk protector on the anchor Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to increase the length of a pull Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery strap attached directly to the winch hook Never use bungee straps that develop tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of force when stretched e Always disconnect the remote control when not in use Continued 452 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued 4 Always Wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the Never winch when there are less than five wraps of rope wire rope around the winch drum e Always pass remote control through a window to Only the operator should handle the wire rope and avoid pinching lead in door then using remote remote control inside a vehicle 6 Think safety at all times Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch while free spooling rigging or sitting idle Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch General Information CAUTION Practice using your winch before you get stuc
103. located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022670222 022670218 Standard Cab Quad CabG Crew Cab Full Bench Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating amp Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol H Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss 022670206 Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Split Bench V Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position 2 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 Quad Cab Crew Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor inste
104. met prior to pressing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL N and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL N indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL N position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES E HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 571 CONTENTS E IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 571 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500 SERIES IRUCKS c Ei e REPRES RE P 572 Jack Location llle 591 Removal Of Jack And Tools 1500 Series 573 Removing The Spare Tire 593 O Preparations ies oe e ee ree 596 Jack Instructions 1500 Series 579 To Stow The Flat Or Spare 585 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 1500 Series Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped Wheel Nuts Lcd dns RR ces Bl JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 2500 AND 3500 SERIES TRUCKS 2b cee cee m ie Jack Lo
105. numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch with either side up Ignition System Your vehicle may be equipped with either an Ignition Node Module IGNM which operates similar to a stan dard ignition switch or a Keyless Ignition Node KIN which allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Ignition Node Module IGNM If Equipped The Ignition Node Module IGNM operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position Ignition Node Module IGNM 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Keyless Ignition Node KIN If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four
106. object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility App
107. oe ds 413 E STABILIZER SWAY BAR SYSTEM POWER WAGON ONLY 4024 d0 2et4 beds iieri sis 416 E SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER WAGON ONLY 36k eae CORR E e RA Pd 418 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle E DRIVING THROUGH WATER 438 Characteristics a ect Wins eis eee 418 Plowing Risitio Wate cceecceri tertias 438 DDE NON AEE SANE orguineduaps docs Se Shallow Standing Water 438 jt Opener Bocke And DIRE igh 55 UNLOREROAD DRIVING TIES ta itio deni 440 aR E ATEEN 425 atte DENS a M ME Driving Through Water Se eO dM ARN Airing Down For Off Road Driving 430 Things To Know Before Using Your Winch 442 VICE RUE ste e emer quien m Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 444 ad D MEM LE E ds Winch Accessories llle 446 Bl LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL 436 Operating Your Winch sese 447 ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 437 Rigging Techniques eee 461 Acceleration i006 es ee rd 437 E POWER STEERING 2 2202 463 Tractor dame GA waa ene a UO GORGE 437 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ll FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IE EQUIPPED 2 244 5 ek Sr seek ead dep 464 B PARKING BRAKE 5532225222993 6 Rees 464 E BRAKE SYSTEM a c xxx ERE CERO Rs 467
108. of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle release The glove box door will automatically open N 035205586 Glove Box 1 Upper Glove Box 2 Lower Glove Box Upper Glove Box 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To open the lower glove box pull on the handle to release Door Storage the latch and sided the door Front Door Storage If Equipped Storage areas and bottle holders drivers side only are located in the door trim panels 035205588 Lower Glove Box 035205815 Front Door Storage es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 Rear Door Storage Crew Cab Center Storage Compartment If Equipped Storage compartments are located in both the driver and The center storage compartment is located between the passenger door trim panels driver and passenger seats The storage compartment provides an armrest and contains both and upper and lower storage area 035205819 Rear Door Storage v E 035305806 Center Storage Compartment 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation or a collision Only use the center seat ing position when the armrest is full
109. on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 499 WARNING Continued replaced
110. opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed Auto Unlock Doors Programming If Equipped The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis abled as follows For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor dance with local laws 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors if equipped of your vehicle have the Child Protection Door Lock system 021870069 Child Protection Door Lock Location To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade screwdriver or emergency key and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the Child Protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 022605852 Child Lock Control ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE After setti
111. outlet the inverter should automatically reset 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats Power Inverter Outlet The cupholders are located on the backside of the center To turn on the power outlet simply plug in the device portion of the front seat 20 Fold down the center The outlet automatically turns off when the device is section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders unplugged NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Rear Cupholder Quad Cab Mounte Shinar Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear For vehicles equipped with bucket seats there are two cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passen cupholders located in the floor console ger convenience Cupholders Rear Cup Wells 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Cupholder Crew Cab STORAGE Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders Glove Box Storage located in the center armrest The glove box is located on the passenger side
112. pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up STOP START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Stop Start function is developed to save fuel and reduce emissions The system will stop the engine auto matically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met Releasing the brake pedal will automatically re start the vehicle Automatic Mode The Stop Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start It will remain in STOP START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph 8 km h At that time the system will go into STOP START READY and if all other conditions are met can go into an STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Autostop mode ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 To Activate The Autostop Mode The Following Must Occur 1 The system must be in STOP START READY state A STOP START READY message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC within the Stop Start section Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 2 The ve
113. placed on the vehicle Disengage the stowage straps and unfold the Tonneau Cover then attach the rear clamps to the truck bed flange to secure the Tonneau Cover to the vehicle The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the clamped position by placing a lock through the locking hole 0367001174 Locking Hole NOTE Be sure the Tonneau Cover is secured before driving after installation For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover use MOPAR Whitewall amp Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR Leather amp Vinyl Conditioner Protectant UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 255 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 256 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 257 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER BVIC uk uos eee oath X En ERREUR a 267 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 42s RR e re 269 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 271 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages Em 273 EVIC Amber Telltales lees 277 EVIC White Telltales EVIC Red Telltales llle EVIC Green Telltales EVIC Selectable Menu Items 280 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features edane a RR Rt REI 283 Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items 292 Uconnect ACCESS SETTINGS 294 Hard Keys ree m ees 294 SOE
114. position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD To 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off This shift cannot be com pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the origi nal position indic
115. pru urn es Be Oe ee wae at eus 166 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 390 Hazard Warning Flasher liess 571 Headlighisi essere ERIT tee pede ss 162 HighBeam 5 2 9 e Rr bored ees 172 High Beam Indicator llli 261 High Beam Low Beam Select 172 Illuminated Entry 0 00000000 22 Instrument Cluster sses yanasa caga Era a 257 Intetior i dese tea es each ee 167 Oil Press re ime Sea dae AAG Rd 262 722 INDEX EN Passing aeragcheed e x RUD Pa ey Rene as 172 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 000 261 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 262 SEVICE kaa bard ur eR a E RU RUDI E TR a us 678 Side Marker 2 2 e dd 688 Smiattbeams 2 5 3c dea e entre EU IR E dedo 164 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 262 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 262 Traction Control seara ce Wee ee 480 Transfer Case 1 eee ee eee 390 T rn Signal of adds s be ue geh doe Ren 124 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 257 Limited Slip Differential 0 440 Loading Vehicle 2 0 0 eee eee 532 jc POTRETE 488 LOOKS a tected IER e bee Ee d es 34 Automatic DOOf 3 xe ace x Dea cea 37 Child Protection sem wa 38 DOOE se daca bae ESRWeed mpeg s 34 en INDEX 723 Power Door sra rogaa iea e ate a ee eee 36 Low Tire Pressure System san daas asat 508 Lubrication Body sedes RE e44an 4 643 Maintenance Free Battery
116. rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 3904 STARTING AND OPERATING EE For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 Shifting Procedure NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The
117. recovery it is recommended to use tow truck hookup or highway towing You could both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage your vehicle damage to the vehicle SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE WARNI NINE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be e Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle moved out of the PARK position you can use one of the Chains may break causing serious injury or death following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury Column Shifter If Equipped 1 2 3 4 5 Firmly apply the parking brake Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 619 Turn the engine off override tab into the access port ringed circle on the bottom of the steering column Push and hold the override release lever up Shift Lever Override Access Port 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Center Console Shifter If Equipped 1 Turn the engine off 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the shift lever override access cover which is located on the right side of th
118. safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must r
119. seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it T he h latch l i o open the hood two latches must be released belobe miss the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel 031305529 Safety Latch Location 1500 Series Shown Hood Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head light switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and fog lights if equipped 1 031405770 Headlight Switch Location 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headligh
120. seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embosse
121. seating position have combi nation lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly Continued WARNING Continued Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Nev
122. selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Un derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
123. shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 445 e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been o
124. soft keys in two to five minutes the radio that allow the driver and passenger to operate 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from LOW to OFF automatically based on time and tempera ture of the seat The heated seats can operate on HIGH heat for a maximum of 20 minutes before switching to LOW heat at that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operate for a maximum of 40 minutes before automatically shutting OFF The heated seats can shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illu
125. system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled STARTING AND OPERATING 531 e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 1s If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information C
126. that the following four Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures ratings are not exceeded sures before trailer usage 1 GVWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 2 GIW Information in Starting and Operating for the 3 GAWR proper inspection procedure 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor utilized mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher Towing Requirements Tires load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact GVWR and GAWR limits spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to 548 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not r
127. the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps 1 Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position 2 Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 3 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time CAUTION to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the 4 Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC 1P seconda before trying again displays OFF Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C sed INI
128. the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL N button After the NEUTRAL N button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selec tor switch With electronic shift transfer case with pushbutton selector switch press and hold the switch for the desired transfer case position until the NEUTRAL N indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL N turning the engine OFF is not required but may be helpful to avoid gear clash With the 8 speed automatic transmission the engine must remain running since turning the engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL 568 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 5 7 8 9 Turn the engine OFF Shift automatic transmission into NOTE With electronic shift transfer case PARK On 8 speed transmissions the shifter will auto matically select PARK when the engine is turned off Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on a manual transmission Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle Start the engine Press and hold the brake pedal 10 Release the parking brake 11 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally e Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
129. the closed position The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond the tail gate The bed extender will add an additional 15 in 38 cm in the back of the truck when additional cargo room is needed The extender position utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both sides of the truck bed near the tailgate Side Gates Closed 5 Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place and assist against theft UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 2 Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the LT center handle vertically in order to release the ex tender side gates 3 Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle 036706569 Extender Position To install the bed extender into the extender position perform the following 1 Lower the tailgate Extender Installation 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure WARNING into place To reduce the risk of potential injury or property damage e Cargo must be secured Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs e Extender should not be used as cargo tie down e When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg load on the tailgate e The bed extender is not intended for off road use e When not in use the extender divider should be in stowed or divider
130. the lid The RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access Lift the lid to RamBox Pushbutton And Lock fully open The interior of the RamBox will automatically illumi nate when the lid is opened In addition to the automatic illumination switch there is a manual on off switch located at the rear of each storage bin Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on NOTE RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is pressed if the RamBox is locked ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 CAUTION Continued it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off manually using the on off switch Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs to allow water to drain from bins To remove plug pull up on the edge To install push plug downward into drain hole NOTE Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports These accessories in addi tion to other RamBox accessories are available from MOPAR RamBox Light Switch E abies Locking And Unlocking RamBox CAUTION Press and release the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time RKE transmitter to lock and unlock all doors the tailgate could cause the vehicle battery to discharge If the lid and the RamBox if equipped Refer to Remote Key is required to stay open for extended periods of time less Entry for fur
131. the mirrors will fold in press the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag Power Folding Mirror Switch 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select Buttons 2 Four Way Mirror Control Switch Power Mirror Controls Location To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but P button to select the mirror that you want to adjust tons and a four way mirror control switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four Heated Mirrors If Equipped arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Some vehicles may not be equipped with rear window defroster in this case the heated mirrors will still function as intended Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The F
132. the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 530 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ADDING FUEL NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap The fuel filler cap gas cap is located behind the fuel tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door filler door on the left side of the vehicle Open the fuel CAUTHON door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter CAUTION clockwise Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
133. the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed up operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the 646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The
134. ting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and other mov ing parts 054000968 STARTING AND OPERATING 449 Snatch Block Pulley Used properly the multi purpose snatch block allows you to 1 increase the winch s pulling power and 2 change your pulling direction without damaging the wire rope Proper use of the snatch block is covered in Before You Pull 450 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 054000969 Clevis D Shackles The D Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of cables straps and snatch blocks The shackle s pin is threaded to allow easy re moval 054000970 Operating Your Winch Tree Trunk Protector Typi cally made of tough high quality nylon it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor points and objects as well as protect liv ing trees WARNING Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding proper winch usage may result in severe injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook when spooling wire rope in or out Never use as a hoist Never use to move persons Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the wire rope Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or under load Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
135. tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 060573853 586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle properly across the wheel opening Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube 060573852 060573851 EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587 4 Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place 060573850 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 1500 Series 3 Secure the tool bag straps to the jack 1 Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug 2 Position the jack and tool bag Make sure the lug wrench is under the
136. to proceed and have shifted into the appropri ate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest pos sible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll over which may result in severe injury or death e Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of d
137. to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window LOCKOUT Switch 4 Door Models Only The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the front passenger and rear passenger doors To disable the window controls on the front passenger and rear passen ger doors press the window LOCK button into the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 latched or down position To enable the window controls press the window LOCK button again and return the switch to the released or up position 021970067 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially op
138. type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued 656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons This could result in a collision the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be tion This inspection should be made with the vehicle in taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces a level position the brake fluid Brake sea
139. typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent ee STARTING AND OPERATING 537 steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch 057003770 system may reduce handling stability and braking EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch performance and could result in an accident Incorrect Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information 538 STARTING AND OPERATING 057003769 EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 057003768 EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect Fifth Wheel Hitch The fifth wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over t
140. wheel alignment was set to specifica tions at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow Front end toe in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season This will help prevent uneven tire wear The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked 560 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip ment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures Therefore when transporting the plow angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit Do not exceed 40 mph 64 km h The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions 20 mph 32 km h should be maximum operating speed The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer s instructions Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion When plowing snow to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage the fol
141. will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver c ud a W Optional Floor Shifter 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel to the right of the radio This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the
142. with heaters located in the seat cushions ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 WARNING the seats independently The controls for each seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin below the climate controls or in the radio unit because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes ou can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Sp inal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of tion or other physical condition must exercise care beat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for when using the seat heater It may cause burns HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Press the switch once to select HIGH Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that level heating Press the switch a sec insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion ond time to select LOW level heating This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting Press the switch a third time to shut in a seat that has been overheated could cause the heating elements OFF This is the serious burns due to the increased surface tempera same procedure for the soft keys in the ture of the seat radio NOTE 030905580 Front Heated Seats e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within There are two heated seat switches as well as
143. 344 032771345 Fast Tone Continuous Tone 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 79 45 in 45 31 in 31 18 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 115 cm 115 80 cm 80 45 cm 18 in 45 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd 1st Solid Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced NOTE ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense amp ParkSense amp can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch Pya OFF When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis able the system the instrument cluster will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for approximately five seconds Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE NOTE The ParkSense system will automatically dis ab
144. 5 664 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care llus 664 Wheel Cover wes ua der ERG 590 Wheel Nut Torque 2 2 0 0 eee ae 590 Meli ae eat at alin enemas aaa 445 AACCeSSOFIOS 4 oia pd d ga dee hedge hase dy 449 Op ration s oen as RR Re RAUS TR e cd 450 Rigging Techniques llle 463 Usage sedere Crete Ea RH e TRA rid 445 Wind Buffetng s 4s edere d dore PR ped 47 Window Fogging llle 332 MandOWS ius eeu d ee a ode E aos dd 44 POW CP 2 ate aaa thon Hose Sacr ea hte ee ed a edd 44 Rear Sliding beet eem e 227 Windshield Defroster 122 Windshield Washers eee 172 Fluid usar e PERSE RS 172 Windshield Wiper Blades 040 644 Windshield Wipers 1 2 2 2 lille 172 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 644 Wipers Intermittent llle 173 Wipers Rain Sensitive ias sk eae ih eme 175 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused
145. 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021871224 Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
146. A This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Se maximum payload may have been exceeded or v load leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order to protect the air suspension system air suspension adjustment is limited due to payload e Service StoplStart System Telltale If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate that the NI Stop Start is Unavailable service Stop Start system CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire EVIC White Telltales e Electronic Speed Control Ready This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 EVIC Red Telltales This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar m e Oil Pressure Warning Light 377 This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure If the light tur
147. Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems U ram STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Cli 13D241 126 AE 5th Edition Printed in U S A
148. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint ible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt vehicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat seat of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two y
149. Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep
150. C is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags if equipped SAB air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear rollover or side collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration ov
151. CAUTION Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear center caps Damage can occur to the center cap and or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used A pulling motion not a pry off motion is recom mended to remove the caps For single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off Insert the blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be removed For the front hub cap on models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed CAUTION Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops o
152. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly 662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abras
153. Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 710 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a
154. E transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped 021970066 Power Window Switches The control on the left front door panel has UP DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or
155. ED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 11 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph 9 km h ParkSense amp Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 in 45 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 ParkSense amp Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Pro grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or fro
156. EL 303 e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto Dim High Beams SmartBeam If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams softkey until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights Smart Beam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights If E
157. ENTS PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION catestetetecsedeatasesen tp isidet aeaiee eni Rida dd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE see 9 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0 e 125 3o UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL see hen 253 4 STARTING AND OPERATING aua Dowda theo paced were Dau v pa bead a odd 335 mm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 even s ade E REDE EY TER E EIE RUCRUR BARI RES 569 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429993 534 3 CEDAR ERE DRE MW SIUE SU E RR 627 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 426i tud ces PR ERN S VOCE e UE emen d eR id a 695 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 46er ERE RES REX RERET CREER E 703 9 INDEX H 713 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION eeeeennn nnn BBR 4 Bi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 E VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 E VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS 6 4 INTRODUCTION EBENEN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation
158. GINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 630 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L 631 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 632 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 633 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 633 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 3 3 ach acie draco ace Re SO IG d 634 W REPLACEMENT PARIS 3 43200 28 eu Rd 635 B DEALER SERVICE ssy ss04 25 0404 Y 635 ll MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OI i costituita Engine Oil Filter s 04 025 4 08 06408 Re wd Engine Air Cleaner Filter Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Front Driveshaft Lubrication 2500 3500 Four Wheel Drive Models Ram Trucks Only o gee aba nan aah gre aa tur an Med tend Body Lubrication 25s Windshield Wiper Blades 628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ME Adding Washer Fluid 645 W BULB REPLACEMENT 680 Exhaust System 0 0 0 0 00000 645 Base Quad Premium Bi Halogen Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Front Park Cooling System 1 6 eee eee 648 And Tum If Equipped 680 Brake System 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 654 Fog Lamps If Equipped o on onn 683 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal A
159. HICLE Sa Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing 030471112 Automatic Dimming Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video display illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view camera located on the tailgate handle The auto dimming feature is also d
160. Headlamp Low Beam Premium Bi Halogen 9005 Fog Lamp Horizontal 9145 shape Fog Lamp Vertical 9006 shape Center High Mounted 921 Stop Lamp CHMSL Rear Cargo Lamp 921 Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA Base Rear Tail Turn and 3157K Stop Lamp Premium Rear Tail Turn and Stop Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Front Turn Signal Lamp Premium Headlamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Premium Backup Lamp T20 Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194 680 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Remove the two plastic push in rivets that secure the Bulb Number P P Side Marker Lamps 194 upper radiator seal to the radiator Dual Rear Wheels 5 Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle PP Backup Lamp 921 6 Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws Rear License Plate Lamp 194 BULB REPLACEMENT Base Quad Premium Bi Halogen Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Front Park And Turn If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 3 Remove the four plastic push in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 681 7 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel remove the fastener and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the rear of the lamp can b
161. ICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 517 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring WEENING Continued Telltale Light will turn OFF and the pressure value Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label which will be updated and stop flashing or return to it s is located on the rear face of the driver door opening original color as long as no tire pressure is below the Failure to do so may cause you to lose control low pressure warning limit in any of the four active resulting in an a
162. ING The air suspension system uses a high pressure volume of air to operate the system To avoid per sonal injury or damage to the system see your authorized dealer for service Air Suspension Modes The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspen sion system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled This mode is intended to be used with engine running Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Transport Mode To assist with flat bed towing the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system This mode is intended to be used with engine running Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Protection Mode n order to protect the air suspension system the vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load level ing cannot be achieved Some driving may be re quired to clear the protection mode telltale in the ee STARTING AND OPE
163. ING Sx NOTE e e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehic
164. INTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661 NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60 70 F 16 21 C Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change Re check the fluid level and adjust as required once the transmission reaches normal operating tempera ture CAUTION If the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading Run the engine at idle in PARK to warm the fluid 8 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter s if the transmis sion is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage
165. If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation Six Speed Transmission The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but will shift down into second and first gears normally Use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears and ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 and 6 Overdrive gears are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the ERS switch column shift or tapping the shift lever to
166. Information Label It is also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appro priate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle Max Load condition The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to change between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition Refer to the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label for the vehicle s Light Load inflation pressures and Tire and Loading Information label for the vehicle s Max Load inflation pressures ee STARTING AND OPERATING 519 d SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION A FOR LIGHT LOAD AND MAX LOAD CONDITIONS uU x LIGHT LOAD DEFINITION OCCUPANTS 150 LSS BACH PLUS H00 LES CARGO MAX LOAD OSFINITION 280 kPs 40 PBI 485 kPs 70 PSI 345 kPa 50 Psi SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION f Ti 81c57c10 Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label To switch from the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold begin by placing the ignition switch in the RUN position Next lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label The Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of the driver
167. K EYS i s scene te ens e edicto 295 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Bl Uconnect amp RADIOS IF EQUIPPED 309 Bl iPod 9 USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 310 ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED 432 capiat REY 3b acea 310 Radio Operation llle 311 CD Player tac oo eua siste Oo dee ahaa eis 311 B CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 4 311 ll RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 312 E CLIMATE CONTROLS amp 3mm o oen 312 Manual Climate Controls Without Touch Screen lf Equipped sansapa RE RR Re P ates 313 Manual Climate Controls With Touch Screen If Equippeds titan dE euo Orr pie perenne ts 318 Automatic Climate Controls With Touch Screen It Equipped eec meae 323 Summer Operation a ses drecedeat nemaji 329 Winter Operation ide dubbed ns 330 Vacati n Storage cesse ae ce eee a 330 Window Fogging and Frosting 330 Outside Air Intake 0 4 330 Operating Tips Chart 0 331 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040170078 1 Headlight Switch 7 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 Gear Selector Transfer Case Position Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 14 Ignition Switch 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank Engine Start Stop ESC 15 Hood Release OFF TOW HAUL Electronic Trailer Brake Air S
168. Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 1 2 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat 110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether stra
169. Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F58 20 Amp Engine Cooling F63 20 Amp IgnitionCoils Gas Yellow Pump Yellow Urea Heater Diesel Gas En F64 25 Amp Fuel Injectors gine Natural Powertrain PA ADP F65 10 Amp USB interface Natural Red Diesel Engine F66 Es n ed e ger Window F60 md Underhood Lamp Switches Rain ue Sensor ix a mda ed Cond 3 F67 lUAmp CD DVD nasi TU SNR Red Bluetooth Hands F62 10 Amp Air Conditioning free Module If Red Clutch Equipped ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675 Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F69 15 Amp Mod SCR 12V If F74 20 Amp Brake Vacuum Blue Equipped Yellow Pump Gas Diesel F70 30 Amp Fuel Pump Motor Gas If Equipped Green Engine FA 25 Amp Amplifier 10 Amp Natural Red e F72 10 Amp Voltage Stabilizer Diesel Red Modules If Esel ngine Equipped F75 10 Amp Coolant Tempera Red ture Valve Actuator F76 10 Amp Antilock Brakes Red Electronic Stability Control 676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Micro Description Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse F77 10 Amp Drivetrain Control F82 10 Amp Steering Column Red Module Front Axle Red Control Module Disconnect Module Cruise Control F78 10 Amp Engine Control F84
170. N Never use a tire with a smaller load index or F EQUIPPED capacity other than what was originally equipped A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load gers 150 lbs 68 kg each plus 200 lbs 91 kg of cargo index could result in tire overloading and failure Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle You could lose control and have a collision will be found on the face of the driver s door CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 504 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE CHAINS NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Continued CAUTION Continued Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especial
171. ND OPERATING ME 9 If the trailer wheels lockup indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric over Hy draulic Trailer Brakes Electric over Hy draulic Trailer Brakes Load Under 10 000 Ibs Above 10 000 Ibs Under 10 000 Ibs Above 10 000 lbs The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking per formance Condition of the trailer brakes driving and road state may also affect the selection EVIC Display Messages The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display messages along with a single chime will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection trailer brake control or on the trailer Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information en STARTING AND OPERATING 553 NOTE CAUTION Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result i
172. NSTRUMENT PANEL 261 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 9 Air Bag Warning Light 9 This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 10 Oil Pressure Gauge If Equipped TH The pointer should always indicate some oil pres sure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indi cate a lubrication system malfunction Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer 11 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph km h 12 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped 5 This ind
173. NSTRUMENT PANEL ME feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn with Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Sound Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then p
174. OUR VEHICLE 143 CAUTION Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if When the desired position has been reached movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s mm path Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat Some models are equipped with a six way power pas will move in the direction of the switch Release the senger seat The power seat switch is located on the switch when the desired position is reached outboard side of the seat The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support Lumbar Control Switch Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped
175. RATING 415 EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE e If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Set tings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Messages When the appropriate conditions exist a message will appear in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected Operation The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve When raising if multiple indicator lamps are flashing the highest flashing indicator lamp is the posi tion the system is working to achieve When lowering if multiple indicators are flashing the lowest solid indica tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve Pressing the UP button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position assuming all conditions are met ie key in ON RUN position engine running speed below threshold etc The UP button can be pressed multiple ti
176. RONT REAR LOCK position drive the ve hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action WARNING Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving A locked front axle is intended for off road driving only Locking the front axle during on road driving will reduce the steering ability This could cause a collision and you may be seriously injured To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to FRONT REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 NOTE The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock To unlock the front axle move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK The FRONT REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked NOTE The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles To unlock the rear axle move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked STABILIZER SWAY BAR SYSTEM POWER WAGON ONLY Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations Due to the use of t
177. RSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPP
178. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e e e e The ignition key is in OFF position The vehicle s electrical systems are not intact The 9 1 1 Call system software and or hardware are damaged during a crash The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon nected during a vehicle crash Wireless and or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed Equipment malfunction at the 9 1 1 operator facility Operator error by the 9 1 1 operator Wireless network congestion Weather and Buildings structures geographic terrain or tunnels NOTE Never place anything on or near the vehicle s wireless and GPS antennas You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9 1 1 Call system to function properly General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received includ ing interference that may cause undesired operation If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SAB and SABIC if equipped air bags may deploy on both sides of the ve
179. S8 S9 2 8 8 S8 8 j Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E Or Kilometers o o eo o eo 2 2 2 S 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 2 S S gt PERRIS AE ER LALA af Additional Inspections E Inspect the CV joints X X X IUE Inspect front suspension tie rod MI ends and replace if necessary d X x 3 Inspect the front and rear axle 8 surfaces If gear oil leakage is suspected check the fluid level If using your vehicle for police A 5 5 5 taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing change axle fluid EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 699 3 6L engine Replace the top row intake side Mileage or time passed o o o o e o o o 2 S Ss 2 Ss B whichever comes tirs 9 9 9 9 89 8 3 8 S oso lelelele Alale Bl S RI 8 8 9 r s 9 sz Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o lololo 2 2 2 2 2 e 2 2 2 98 8 8 8 88 8 8 8 8 S 8 S8 amp amp a lolelol es e co st S o eN co A oe o v o oo lrt Ri e T 8 S8S a amp Inspect the brake linings parking X X X X X X X brake function Inspect transfer case fluid X X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace spark plugs X 4 7L Engine of spark plugs 4 7L Engine X X X X x Replace the side row exhaust side of spark plugs X M A l N T E N A N c E S e H E D U L E S 8
180. Sunroof Express 205 Pinch Protect Feature lessen 206 Venting Sunroof Express 206 Sunshade Operation 00 206 Wind Buffeting iis ec rg 206 Sunroof Maintenance 00 207 Ignition Off Operation 0 207 M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 207 ll CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED erm RE REPRE EVA 211 ll POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 212 B CUPHOLDERS x 2 reme 213 Front Seat Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats 213 Mounted Shifter Rear Cupholder Crew Cab STORAGE s L2 a t Glove Box Storage Door Storage Equipped 40 25 2444 es Seatback Storage Storage Regular Cab Storage and Seats Crew Cab Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Rear Cupholder Quad Cab Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Center Storage Compartment If Equipped 218 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models ll REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped ll FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED ll PICKUP BOX ll RAMBOX IF EQUIPPED RamBox Integrated Box Side Stora
181. TE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button Remote Start Active Push Start Button will dis play in the EVIC until you press the start button Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information e Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For
182. TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting and Operating for further information In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill the system recognizes when the TOW HAUL switch is activated and compen sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill 474 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN WARNING Continued HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK or using the parking brake it will roll down the WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the incline while resuming accelera tion manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is re sponsible for braking the vehicle Continued incline and could collide with another vehicle object or person and cause serious or fatal injury Always remember to use t
183. The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome OFF position rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far left detent position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock all doors tailgate and the RamBox if equipped as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi mately 33 ft 10 m using a hand held radio transmitter with integrated key The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors the tailgate and the RamBox if equipped The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 020207434 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter WIN 021369395 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter Keyless Enter N Go Fob KIN Remote Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door If EVIC is setup for driver door first otherwise this will unlock all doors
184. To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury If Engine Fails To Start Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it If the engine fails to start after you have followed the started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it could enter the catalytic converter and once the there while cranking the engine This should clear any engine has started ignite and damage the converter excess fuel in case the engine is flooded and vehicle Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator
185. Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts
186. UIPPED 22 M SENTRY KEY 0 0 000 eee 18 W REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE Replacement Keys cscceceeeeeeere 19 IF EQUIPPED 1 ei rt eas een e 23 Customer Key Programming 20 BO Remote Unlock The Doors 24 O General Information 004 20 TOTO CTNE DOO cesis se edeges te gatas 26 ll VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 21 Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock 27 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Using The Panic Alarm lisse 27 MD WINDOWS axcse vets C HERR e CR 42 RKE Air Suspension Remote Lowering Of The Power Windows If Equipped 42 MERE eC sede os tia de m Wind Buffeting esses sees 46 Programming Additional Transmitters 29 E OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 2 022 46 Transmitter Battery Replacement 29 Lap Shoulder Belts isses 50 General Information llle 30 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 58 nn aaa LN NE 30 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 59 How To Use Remote SHE ee emcee 31 Center Lap Belts 245 430454 rtt 40045 829465 60 E DOOR LOCKS sss 34 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 60 Manual Door Locks 00000005 34 a Minds ME den ion F 6l Been Hoop Lotte TEP dosage m Energy Management Feature
187. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 e Floor Mode P Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window v demister outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions 6 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 7 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 8 Temperature Control Down Button Push the button for cooler temperature settings On the touch screen slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings 9 Temperature Control Up Button Push the button for warmer temperature settings On the touch screen slide the te
188. V 0 0 0 0 20 0000 213 Jack Location 2 0 eee eee 572 Jump Starting s 4 enr rua metang i a ee eer aed 612 Key In Reminder llle 18 Keyless Enter N Go 0 0 000000004 39 Keyless Entry System llle 23 Key Programming cec 229 os ae ea eras 20 Key Replacement iiu edo erp s HR E gr 19 Keys creek oe a RUE Ge E Ie a Rao Le dea 12 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 18 Lane Change and Turn Signals 171 Lane Change Assist s sb X beg ee 172 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0000000004 51 Latchies 4 2 9 Bodh bed Eden S EE RE ES 124 Lead Free Gasoline llle 521 Leaks Ehud a ie sr ep RE te ee ee 124 Lite of IDr68 iu aaa de reed en ha Hoe hg t 501 Light Bulbs euer meet eme toes 124 Lights i d sca eer ie RG dee EG EP EE 124 AIDA irse mute xata cereum E Cer arn eed ea es 74 Alarm 2i22ek e e eae ee 3 Race Res 262 Antt Eock 4 onde wbDRS SORORE IRE 257 Automatic Headlights 6 162 Brake Assist Warning elles 480 Brake Warning ied cs exe E eR eb Bulb Replacement Cap Top Clearance i i ence E t od 686 CATO sonans exe Tip ahi es wer eR d ERR debts 170 Center Mounted Stop 00 684 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 257 Courtesy Reading 2v ees tas e 168 Daytime Running ssia ate aces E eis 163 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 480 EXIGFOE ui obra poe dee eti d s 124 BOR cou 2
189. VIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or 1 This device may not cause harmful interference gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety info
190. Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash Rearming Of The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the re maining doors and ignition To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed To Disarm The System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the exterior lights will blink three times Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro grammed Sentry Key is inserted into the ignition 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee switch To exit the alarming mode press t
191. YSTEM TPMS 505 SDIBBReLOpere Tine Tt RIDGE sodes ds Base System 5i cs hci Soar Was uke E pda 508 Full Size Spare If Equipped 496 Premium System If Equipped 510 Pips Use ndis lr RAED oceans wana ad Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Light Tire Spinning kem e er eR ERR E eee aed 497 Load Inflation Switch Description 2500 Models Tread Wear Indicators 497 d Vises ahi aaa edhe a ea PIS Life OF Tire oo LLL Lll 498 General Information 4 518 Replacement Tires 0000 499 a UR aaa teense ae ee E SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION 3 6L And 4 7L Engine lesse 518 IF EQUIPPED eee 500 5 7L ENGNG grees or cee ee eee ae ees 519 B IRECHAINS eene 501 Reformulated Gasoline 0 519 ll TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 503 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 520 STARTING AND OPERATING M 340 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 520 MMT In Gasoline 0 000 521 Materials Added To Fuel 521 Fuel System Cautions 0 521 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 522 ll FLEXIBLE FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED 2 ane eb xe s 523 E 85 General Information 523 Ethanol Fuel E 85 2 00040 524 F
192. aced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer
193. ad Cab or Crew Cab Trucks The top tether an chorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child restraint 022670227 Right or Left Outboard Seats Head Restraint In Raised Position 1 Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop 114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 3 Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised Position 2 Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115 4 Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop see NOTE If there are child seats in both of the outboard left diagram Tighten the tether strap according to the and right seating positions the tether strap hooks of child seat manufacturer s instructions both child seats should be connected to the center tether strap loop T
194. ad of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Can the head restraints be re moved No E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Mega Cab Standard Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re
195. added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 NOTE On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the WARNING Continued transfer case is in a drive position e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL WARNING if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is Your vehicle could move and injure you and others firmly pressing the brake pedal if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal Continued released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When th
196. ading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 488 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 055001823 B Pillar Location for Tire And Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 489 Tire And Loading Information Placard 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD Loading NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You d will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section 811b5a9a of this manual Tire and Loading Information Placard NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear This placard tells you important information about axles must not be exceeded For further informati
197. aid in attaching detaching the trailer from the vehicle the air suspension system can be used Refer to Air Suspension System in Starting and Operating for further information NOTE The vehicle must remain in the engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of CAUEON the air suspension system Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can SNOWPLOW cause damage to the vehicle 1500 Models Only WARNING NOTE Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow applications sion resulting in serious injury or death Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision Continued 558 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de scribed earlier in this manual 2500 3500 Models Only Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Body Builders Guide See your authorized dealer installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems WARNING Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
198. ake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicl
199. al Off or ESC Off modes Refer to the ESC portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESC operating modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway 482 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings D Lars rg v NO 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 483 compact spa
200. aller springs this vehicle has an increased ride height of approximately 1 9 in 48 3 mm in the front and 1 5 in 38 1 mm in the rear A major advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on approach departure and break over angles This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the instrument panel 420 STARTING AND OPERATING remain in the On Road mode during normal driving conditions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury or death The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is nec LOCK AXLE FRONT REAR UNLOCK LOCK gt S SWAY BAR pP essary for maintaining control of the vehicle The 052307134 system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing off road light and solid on road light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will attempt to return to the Off Road mode 1 On Road 2 Off Road The switch has two positions On Road and Off Road The system is normally in the On Road mode indicated by a solid green light The stabilizer sway bar should To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4HI or 4LO as shown in Four Wheel Drive Operation and
201. allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power 7 Attach the Clevis D shackle and Tree Trunk Protector Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the hook loop being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn 054000976 Clevis D Shackles 8 Lock the clutch Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever on the winch to engage NOTE Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 9 Connect the remote control to the winch control box 10 Put wire rope under tension Using the remote con located behind the front bumper Be careful not to let trol switch slowly wind the wire rope until no slack the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch If remains Once the wire rope is under tension stand you choose to control the winch from inside your well clear of it and never step over it vehicle always pass the remote through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door Always discon nect the remote control when not in use 054000978 LU 11 Check your anchor Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the 054000977 winching procedure 458 STARTING AND OPERATING 12 Check wire rope The wire rope should be neatly In certain situations you may wound around th
202. an damage drivetrain components Lock the rear axle before attempting situations or navigating terrain which could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch The switch has three positions AXLE UNLOCK REAR LOCK and FRONT REAR LOCK Under normal driv ing conditions the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position In the AXLE UNLOCK position the front and rear axles are unlocked In the REAR LOCK 418 STARTING AND OPERATING ME position the rear axle is locked In the FRONT REAR LOCK position the front and rear axles are locked NOTE Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments During the command to lock the axle the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked After the lock command has been successfully executed the light will remain on solid To lock the rear axle place the vehicle in 4LO Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked NOTE Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or F
203. and the tire es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value If the Tire Pressure system requires service Service Tire Pressure System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Press and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System IPMS under Starting and Operating for further information Trip A Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in the EVIC Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip A information will display the following i tripA e Distance e Average Fuel Economy e Average Speed e Elapsed Time Hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to reset all the information Trip B fact Press and release the Left or Right arrow but tripB ton until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the EVIC Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B The Trip B information will display the following Distance Average Fuel Economy 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Average Speed Stop Start If Equipped Elapsed Time P d release the UP or DOWN Hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to reset all the A boton and the dipidan hu highlighted inf
204. antage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 525 WARNING Continued Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain car
205. antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649 CAUTION CAUTION Continued Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not damage and may decrease corrosion protection be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Adding Coolant system in an emergency it should be flushed with OAT coolant and replaced with the specified OAT Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool Continued ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is
206. anufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 708 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION Se
207. ar of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle Weigh ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier 534 STARTING AND OPERATING ME items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing relat
208. ases must be shifted into NEUTRAL N for recre ational towing Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing Manual transmissions must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recre ational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL N shifting procedure for your vehicle CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Continued 564 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case causing damage to CAUTION Continued Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK for recreational towing e Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing internal parts Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Before recreational towing perform the procedure Shifting Into NEUTRAL N outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL N to be Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL recreational towing N Otherwise internal damage will result WARNING Towing this v
209. ate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se seconds and then returns to the previous screen An example of this message type is Automatic High Beams On Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU but ton To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal press the ENGINE START STOP but
210. ate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline ee STARTING AND OPERATING 473 Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEU TRAL Towing And Hauling With HSA The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW HAUL switch lo cated on the center stack is selected When activated the
211. atically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The switch for the power sliding rear window is located Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to 5 the overhead console the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 034237087 Rear Window Switch Push the switch to the right to open the glass Pull the switch to the left to close the glass es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Unfolding the Load Floor A locking device in the center of the window helps to 1 Lift the 60 40 seat assist to the upward position prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Quad Cab and Crew Cab model
212. ating for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Park level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fas tened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension 624 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 8 speed transmission Wheel Lift Front Towing Wheels 2WD Models 4WD Models Condition OFF the Ground Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable See instructions in Recreational Tow e Transmission in NEUTRAL ing under Starting and Operating e 30 mph 48 km h max speed Auto Transmission in PARK 15 miles 24 km max distance Manual Transmission in gear NOT 6 speed transmission NEUTRAL e 30 miles 48 km max distance e Transfer Case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED or Dolly Rear OK NOT ALLOWED Tow Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 625 If you must use the accessories wipers defrost
213. ation of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protec tion of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all
214. ator light will remain ON At this time 3906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not the shift flashing shift the transmission back into gear 2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW Alternate Procedure NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the detrimental to the vehicle or occupants e 16n n P engine either OFF or running shift the transmission Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to into NEUTRAL 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped You can use either of the following procedures 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position Pref P pitied SOR 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to flashing shift the transmission back into gear 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 NOTE 4WD 4WD AUTO LOCK A4wp e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator ligh
215. ay ccce 163 BUPRINESSMENORCSE DSTI each SmartBeam If Equipped isses 163 Programming The Memory Feature 108 Parking Lights And Panel Lights 165 Linking And Deining The Remote Keyless E o plius I Bupa scere is Memory Position Recall sss 158 Hig ON RONG s capisqvseldottdi denda Hee E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 158 battery Savet oe seces cioe e y ERR ea es 166 Interior Lights llle 166 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Campo Light iee caiene iaae ep CIA RC or 170 BM TILT STEERING COLUMN 4 RR 176 Multifunction Lever llle 171 Mi HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED 177 Mth Signals 5 3 icis EROR coe eke DC 171 Mi DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Lane Change Assist 00006 172 EEE aeti tse E e Hlash Io Pass 4 5429 49 REPRE 172 ES Nee High Low Beam Switch sess 172 lo Activate ue ners eg eA ca varnlews 4 E WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 172 To Set A Desired Speed soos 182 Windshield Wipers sese 172 To Deactivate 6 eee 182 Windshield Wiper Operation 173 Ta RSME PEs ex beaut aati h densest oe Intermittent Wiper System 173 To V ac cane quiet ee eig ae Windshield Washers lt becca ree ee 173 To Accelerate For Passing 183 Mt Fete c
216. battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to updat
217. be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 021870068 Power Door Lock Switch Location If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Auto Unlock Doors If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is
218. blem diagnosed and corrected TO HAUL 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 24 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 DUNG ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
219. bon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine CAUTION Continued The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer running for more than a short period adjust the NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control ventilation system to force fresh outside air into system can result in civil penalties being assessed against the vehicle you Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main Carbon Monoxide Warnings tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued 526 STARTING AND OPERATING FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L 4 7L ENGINES ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a
220. brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655 The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and an MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper
221. buted in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 533 Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and re
222. buttons if there is more than one message to step through the remaining stored mes sages If there are no message pressing the SELECT RIGHT button will do nothing Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features For vehicles equipped a 3 5 EVIC screen Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the UP and DOWN button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to display one of the following choices For vehicles equipped with a 7 EVIC screen and not equipped with a Uconnect Access 8 4 radio Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Use the UP or DOWN button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to Enter Vehicle Settings Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices NOTE Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with the following settings Language When in this display you may select one of six languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Italian German Dutch Then as you
223. by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031464205 Fog Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Lights On Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights ar
224. cal cord could cause electrocution speed ee Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firmly pressing the brake pedal i NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while CAUTION shifting out of PARK Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the transmis sion shifter is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement e When leavin
225. camera mode is exited Active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Zones Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0 1 ft 0 30 cm Yellow 1 ft 3 ft 30 cm 1 m Green 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance
226. catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic converter
227. cation 13 64 0 40424428 RS Removal Of Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series ves Removing The Spare Tire Preparations 6 0 eee eee eee 587 589 570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jack Instructions 2500 3500 Series 597 W FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 616 To Stow The Flat Or Spare issus 604 B EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 618 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 2500 And WM SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 618 3500 Series scele mr eee 606 Column Shifter I Equipped 619 T AP ipa Ose aac tee Bos Center Console Shifter If Equipped 620 Wheel Nuts e ceva ae ua as 590 E MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED B HOISTING 4 2 em eem 612 TRANSMISSION 3 6L Engine 621 ll JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 612 Mi TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 622 Preparations For Jump Start 613 Two Wheel Drive Models 625 Jump Starting Procedure 614 Four Wheel Drive Models 626 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an em
228. ccident causing serious or fatal road tires injury Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Light The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the Load Inflation Switch Description 2500 Models driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure If Equipped cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition The Tire and Loading Information label defines the recommended front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle when operating in the Max Load condition A Supple mental Tire Pressure Information label is also available defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when oper Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure settings if carrying more than two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 pounds 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the ating in the Light Load condition When the tire light Continued 518 STARTING AND OPERATING load inflation switch LED is ON the TPMS is using the Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation If light load inflation pressure cold low inflation warning Equipped thresholds This vehicle may have different recommended tire pressure values between the front and rear tires as shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and the Supplemental Tire Pressure
229. ce the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive power tools is not recommended and can damage the vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position winch WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579 5 Turn the ignition OFF WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from the Block both the front and rear of the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking vehicle position For example if the right front Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher wheel is being changed block the left Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to rear wheel be raised 060505162 Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle REVERSE when the vehicle is being jacked Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a Jack Instructions 1500 Series jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued Continued 500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on WARNING Continued Only use the jack in the positions ind
230. ch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings If Equipped After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compa
231. ck panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click For proper seat belt usage refer Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 022632836 In Use Position Inserting Latch Plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu pant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding proce dure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the black latch and black buckle Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted u
232. ck for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off 031464209 High Low Beam Switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Intermittent Wiper System The int
233. climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and ra 712 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor mance Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test WARNING wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load Temperature Grades ing either separately or in combination can cause The temperature grades are A the highest B and C heat buildup and possible tire failure representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hyd
234. clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx NOTE e e The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift to sixth gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because sixth gear is disabled and engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmis sion is able to shift into and out of Overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically
235. column shift or rearward with the brake pedal released console shift after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued es STARTING AND OPERATING 367 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi
236. continue the information will display in the selected language Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of mea sure To make your selection press and release the SELECT button the selected setting will be displayed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Nav Turn By Turn If Equipped When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Park Assist System If Equipped The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem fun
237. continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result NOTE The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a Low Tire message in the odometer Base Cluster or in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC screen in dicating Low Tire for EVIC enabled clusters 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped ZO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 18 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 19 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE The highest available transmission gear is dis played in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electro
238. creen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster If Equipped When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you
239. ction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located in the instrument ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case posi tion the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF
240. ction and operating information Tilt Mirror In Reverse When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placed in reverse gear the side mirrors tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated When the system is deactivated the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Hill Start Assist HSA When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this featur
241. d WARNING Continued disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below ram 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 406 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front and rear drive shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Rec
242. d the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received STARTING AND OPERATING 515 EXAMPLE ONLY Tire PSI LH EN esnie 055900260 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 516 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERV
243. d be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667 Tri Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri Fold Tonneau cover us
244. d not be operated for more than 15 could operate power windows other controls or second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such move the vehicle intervals will protect the starter from overheating Normal Starting WARNING Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key fob to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key fob to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to e touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift Automatic Transmission lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or or in a location accessible to children and do not PARK position Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range Continued 5 5 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it The start
245. d on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas NOTE To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the auto matic leveling to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat Removal Of Jack And Tools 1500 Series To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the front passengers seat To remove the cover pull the front part of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is loose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame 574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 060505826 060505827 Jack Access Cover Jack And Tools 1500 Series Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove counterclockwise remove the wing bolt and then slide tools from bag the assembly out from under the seat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575 WARNING After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force re
246. d on the air bag covers 022670244 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad 2 Knee Bolster vanced Front Air Bags NOTE The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact If the vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags they are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
247. d press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
248. djusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demister outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 e Panel Mode M Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and e floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode Ge Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vol demister outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions 6 Blower Control Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual opera
249. dort Rer a EERE Ra 639 Filter uii xp REESE S bad eia md d ped 640 Filter Disposal sess idee Rr end 639 Identification Logo sees 638 Recommendation 00000 e eee aee 638 Synth tie iode ded RE dg ek gee ged sid 639 VISCOSIEY 2a bios ne e deua date ade eat d 639 Oil Filter Selection llle 640 Onboard Diagnostic System 0 633 Operating Precautions lees 633 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors lille 133 Overdrive 0 ee ees 374 Overdrive OFF Switch 00000005 374 Overhead Console 1 0 00000 eee 194 Overheating Engine onan e OR en 266 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 PaintCare sics eic vr d keri ep hae awe 661 Panic Alarmes ug ERR WT ERE pde 28 Parking Brake 2 22 ie b AB REPRE S 467 Park Sense System Rear llle 184 Passing Tight eee Hb Yer EX RR ies 172 Pedals Adjustable lt selcc ansin ke mace hne 179 Personal Settings i eade eee d minkor ire 285 P l isiseexea uu uy ee hs EPPSEASRL REPRE e 119 Pets Transporting se semie Tires caia eee E 119 Pickup Box sess e ma 229 Placard Tire and Loading Information 489 Power Distribution Center Fuses 668 Door Locks eeee ee 36 IVIMEEO S 2 4400 shewe sere Oo Ie UE ee p bvR dd 136 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 208 SEAS C C DUE 14 Sliding Rear Window 05 226
250. e A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the manufac turer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are 636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance attempting any procedure yourself services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed penalties being assessed against you maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may req
251. e and inflate each tire 512 STARTING AND OPERATING ME to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE mes sage will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be mon
252. e MOPAR Whitewall amp Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR Leather and Vinyl Conditioner Protectant Spray On Bedliner If Equipped During ownership the shine and luster of the Spray On Bedliner can fade from oxidation road dirt heavy duty hauling and hard water stains Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading dulling and loss of gloss over time To help maintain the appearance of your Spray On Bedliner the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR Spray On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray On Bedliner Follow The Steps Below 1 Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any loose dirt and debris 2 Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft cloth or brush 3 Rinse bedliner with water 4 Once dry apply a small amount of MOPAR Spray On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner Do not use silicon based protection products to clean your bedliner Silicon based products can become slippery and may result in personal injury 668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Spray On Bedliners are chemically resistant to many different types of chemicals including gasoline oil hydraulic fluids for short periods of time If a spill occurs on your Spray On Bedliner rins
253. e air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is
254. e as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold temperatures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is se lected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 6 Shift into the desired gear range
255. e asain tt eae ea wae bed ees 496 Inflation Pressures 0 000 ee eee 494 Life of THf S 405 4 044288 24 Khee OG PETS RES 501 load Capacity 325a c250 ees Pase d 488 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 508 Pressure Warning Light 262 Quality Grading sere sese 0 cee enini da 711 Radial sss cedem rA et rienak 496 Replacement 1 0 6 eee 502 Rotation uua eem ee Hata Auk ee CR 506 Daley uus sis does dyhs s ees HS Pad od e ROS ey d 482 SIZES acs 3 oA ade cea Ae Rea LAUR SAGE d 483 SHOW TeS gb ded acc RE RS LES RN ERR BR 497 SPINNING uas obe CORSO e Med a h eg 500 Tread Wear Indicators lll 500 en INDEX 729 Tire Safety Information osese sems ae a heia aneii 482 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 544 Tonneau Cover ads epe eere diet 667 Tonneau Cover Cleaning csao matami s ae aa 667 Torque Converter Clutch ess cres eie tatia nies 375 Tow Hooks Emergency llle 618 TOWING a9 2440 235554808 ER RR st io Red 534 Disabled Vehicle o ccs ss srr lesse 623 G id iua Re ee hoe AE eds 540 Recreational o os eee ease serpi e Ras 561 Weights 2er E ReRRER pikpik Y Ed 540 Traction sd oa x eO yeh a aaa ede d 441 Traction Control scs eR d m Rex A71 Trailer Sway Control TSC 00 481 Trailer Towing sc 6 0 6 534 Cooling System Tips 000000 556 Hitch s o ees bored eoe aeger 539 Minimum Requirements 05 545 hh lao DRE 139
256. e attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Press and hold close switch to fully close sunroof Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The power sunroof switch will
257. e buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor 108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109 Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
258. e cases for the channel to train If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 e 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink amp To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the E
259. e dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in the case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 497 the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow
260. e driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Memory To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft
261. e fans operate at two speeds HIGH and LOW Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated 030905581 NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models equipped with remote start the drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat 030905746 Manual Seat Adjuster While sitting in the seat pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or backward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING WARNING Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while Moving a seat while driving could result in los
262. e gained through this access hole 8 Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing 073306875 9 Remove the headlamp assembly Grasp the outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet 10 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket 11 Replace bulb s as necessary 692 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE CAUTION 2 Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb e Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result e Always use the correct bulb size and type for 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the housing CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it 3 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1 4 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp the bulb socket or the lamp wiring NOTE There are access covers over both headlamp bulb With your fingers or by allowing it to contact other access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing if Oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result equipped These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced Rear Tail Stop Turn Si
263. e ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must start the engine and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result The following indicator should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion With brake pedal released look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shif
264. e is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your
265. e it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle 434 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condit
266. e of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated interior switches for door locks are disabled The system provides both au dible and visible signals for the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and
267. e outboard forward in the bed against the front panel ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops 3 036706567 y Cargo Tie Down Loop 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position 036706568 Side Gates Closed 5 Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the panel into place and assist against theft Divider Position The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo To install the bed extender into a divider position per form the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 2 With the side gates open position the extender so the outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of the bed 036706565 Center Handle And Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle Aligning Gate To Slots 3 Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends are secured into the intended slots of the bed 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure theside Extender Position gates in
268. e rope must spool on the winch drum in the direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the winch Low Voltage Interrupt Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level The winch will not power in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped If the interrupt is tripped the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch Winch Motor Thermal Protection Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in the motor If the winch is operated for an excessive duration the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor During this time the winch will power out but will not power in Allow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 054000966 Winch Components 448 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Motor The winch motor is powered by the vehicle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power in direction if the motor gets too hot Remote Socket The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function Winch Drum With Integral Brake The winch drum
269. e shift lever 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the 1 override tab through the access port on the center console Shift Lever Override Access Cover 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 621 MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION 3 6L Engine WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle Manual Park Release Pull Strap 061573655 In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the Follow these SIE Dete use she Manual EGER Release transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead 1 Firmly apply the parking brake battery a Manual Park Release is available 622 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 2 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool remove the 5 The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed Manual Park Release access cover which is just above the parking brake release handle below and to the left of the steeri
270. e spooling drum Improper wind decide to throw a heavy blan ing can cause damage to the wire rope ket or similar object over the wire rope A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the wire rope break Place it on the wire rope midway be tween the winch and the an 054000980 Chor point Do this before the wire rope is put under ten sion Do not approach or move the blanket once tension is applied Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead 77 Tf it is necessary to move or remove the blanket slack the was tension on the wire rope first m L7 054000979 HTT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 459 13 Establish no people zones Make your intentions clear Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull Declare where the spectators should not stand never behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch block Your situation may have other no people zones 054000981 No People Zones 460 STARTING AND OPERATING 14 Begin winching With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on the wire rope begin winching slowly and steadily Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spool ing drum For additional assistance the winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch Continue pulling until the vehicle i
271. e the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 709 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service
272. e the truck out as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage Repairing The Spray On Bedliner While extremely tough it is possible to damage a Spray On Bedliner One common condition is when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible While not covered by your new vehicle warranty a cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required To repair a tear or gouge follow the directions provided in the MOPAR Quick Repair Kit FUSES POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses micro fuses relays and circuit breakers A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669 Cavity Car Micro Description tridge Fuse Fuse F01 80 Amp Rad Fan Control Red Module If equipped F03 60 Amp Rad Fan If Yellow Equipped F05 40 Amp Compressor for Air Green Suspension If Equipped Power Distribution Center Location F06 40 Amp Antilock Brakes Green Electronic Stability Control Pump F07 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green 670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M
273. e to roll off the object without causing further damage This should be tried before attempting any recovery method 436 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first clearing the object may result in additional under body damage e Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your ve hicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly used methods This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying throttle after each shift During this process for addi tional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a turn If you are stuck in mud sand or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free stop and try another method of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not spin your tires faster than an indicated 30 mph 48 km h e Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a s
274. e turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch is rotated to the far right detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way left to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right brighter or left dimmer When the head lights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odometer radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031464206 Dimmer Control Courtesy Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 RKE transmitte
275. e wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result 612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the CAUTION positive battery post Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternat
276. e will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared In this mode ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system shuts off ESC is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC Off Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESC is off To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation ESC Off is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or NEUTRAL to WD LOW the ESC system will be in this mode WARNING In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are disabled Therefore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESC Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only
277. e with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 7 High Beam Indicator Z This light shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
278. e y aiat ee 661 ASDtray stones ines api pepe eee aes 212 Auto Down Power Windows 0 45 Automatic Door Locks 0 00000 37 Automatic Headlights llis 162 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 325 Automatic Transmission 000000 355 Adding Fluid iu cocci oa ae ela 660 Fluid and Filter Changes 661 ne INDEX 715 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 0 00000000000 658 PIU Type ue sent ante tre muore Se tane d 658 Shuf ng iseccacccaa Bye dae ed wed ha ew 364 Special Additives i censas matamis a a ama 659 Axle Fluids ea panaia Tea a aE e T eh RR ows 656 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid Ls 656 Back Up Camera sse 193 Bar Stabilizer Sway System 0 419 Battery s atic de deed Nox acea doigt 641 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 30 Belts Seat s ER Er E ea CLER 51 Body Builders Guide 00 0 0 020s 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication sess 643 B Pillar Location llle 488 Brake Assist System llle A71 Brake Control System Electronic 470 Brake Fluid s bk ki eee 654 Brake SySten sesa taeda aie e e eee RR ead 469 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 0 0 00002 eee eae 470 Fud CHECK x 654 924 23 ach a ah oe a RE 654 Master Cylind r nc ese eem ele ek 654 Parking sane e bee PIRE RAS PRIME 467 Warning Light sack code anita sacs ayaa ee 259 Brake Transmission Interlock
279. ea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 0304052 The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Power Mirror Movement 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor If Equipped Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on auto tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the matically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light sun To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired position Illuminated Vanity Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads To change position inboard or out board the mirror head should be rotated flipped in or out Slide On Rod Extender Trailer Towing Posi
280. eaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645 Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
281. ears old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years
282. eats 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you are installing a Toolbox Ladder Rack or WARNING Continued Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo Vehicle speeds from your authorized dealer may need to be reduced Severe turns or rough You can carry wide building materials sheets of ply roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo wood etc by building a raised load floor Place lumber that may result in vehicle damage If wide building across the box in the indentations provided above the materials are to be frequently carried the installa wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the tion of a support is recommended This will re floor strain the cargo and transfer the load to the pickup WARNING The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur box floor If you wish to carry more than 600 Ibs 272 kg of material suspended above the wheelhouse sup ports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result The use of proper supports will permit loading up to the rated payload Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an accident causing serious or fatal injury poses only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Continued
283. ebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle INTRODUCTION 7 frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title WARNING Ho M aaa m Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ES ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 Rearming Of The System 0 21 Ignition System sese ee 12 To Army The System cec e bex y es 21 Key BOD sues desee ose sube TUS eas 14 To Disarm The System 00 21 Removing Key Fob From Ignition 16 Security System Manual Override 22 Key In Ignition Reminder 18 Hi ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQ
284. ecinere ya MTARKSINSEDREARPARKASSET P 0 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 175 ParkSense Sensors 00000008 184 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Warning Display 188 B OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED 193 ParkSense Display lees 184 Courtesy Reading Lights 194 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense 187 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 195 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 196 System dd sues Sd e prp d cue es ayes 188 Programming A Rolling Code 197 Cleaning The ParkSense System 188 Topenie A Non Rolling Code 2 22 199 ParkSense System Usage Precautions 189 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 200 soe ge UR ELD 5 die ics pee ette d ed 201 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Security uui em pce Rer ue e epe Eus 202 Uconnect 9 5 0 ces ido re ans 193 Troubleshooting Tips lees 202 Turning ParkView On Or Off With General Information 0 203 Uconnect8 8 4A 8 4AN 0 00006 193 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED Opening Sunroof Express 205 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Closing
285. ecom mended Towing Requirements 546 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 547 WARNING Continued Total weight must be distributed between the tow S mE vehicle and the trailer such
286. econdary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 inch hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov ery at the time of the snap by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the pull ing vehicle should let off the throttle without using the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 brakes once signaled by the other driver This se quence is important to avoid having the recovered vehic
287. ecover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle e e Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident then change trans mission into a lower gear shift the transfer case into 4L Low and proceed with caution You should use first gear and 4L Low Range for very steep hills Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability
288. ected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Four Corner Air Suspension Modes If Equipped There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations Tire Jack Mode is se lected to assist in changing a spare tire Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before per forming a wheel alignment refer to your authorized dealer for information Protection Mode will automati cally be selected in order to protect the air suspension system when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PAN
289. ed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the multifunction lever Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place 031605589 Tilt Steering Lever WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING Continued the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has onl
290. ed on the front and rear wheels of trucks equipped with LT235 80R17 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of any model except for 3500 DRW Dual Rear Wheel trucks equipped with LT235 80R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the rear wheels of 1500 model trucks equipped with LT275 70R17 P275 60R20 or 285 45R22 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle 506 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation
291. ed definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not ee STARTING AND OPERATING 535 exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR
292. ee seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position At the tim
293. eed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Con trol in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Selectable Menu Items Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the EVIC 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Digital Speedometer Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to change the display between km h and mph N SPEED 47 Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button Vehicle Info Customer Information Features until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be dis played Press the LEFT or SELECT RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the following information sub menus Air Suspension If Equipped Transmission Temperature Automatic Transmission Only Oil Temp Oil Life Multimeter Tire Pressure Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Tire Pressure is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button and one of the following will be displayed If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON If one or more tires have low pressure Inflate Tire To XX is displayed with the vehicle ICON
294. ehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or You or others could be injured or killed if you leave transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL N position without first fully engaging Continued Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 565 WARNING Continued the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL N position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL N before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop with the engine running Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL 3 Press and hold the brake pedal 4 Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission 5 6 e With manual shift transfer case shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL N With electronic shift transfer case press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL N button Some models have a small recessed N button at the center of the transfer case switches that must be pressed using a ballpoint pen or
295. el Economy Trip A Trip B Audio Stored Messages Screen Set Up UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e SELECI RIGHT Arrow Button gt Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to access select the information screens or sub menu screens of a main menu item Press and hold the SELECT RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed selected fea tures that can be reset e LEFT Arrow Button lt Press the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu from an info screen or sub menu item 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 1 Main Screen The inner ring of the display will Displays illuminate in grey under normal conditions yellow for non critical warnings red for critical warnings and white for on demand information 2 Audio Phone Information and Sub menu Informa tion Whenever there are sub menus available the position within the sub menus is shown here 3 Selectable Information Compass Temp Range to Empty Trip A Trip B Average MPG Trailer Trip distance only Trailer Brake Gain Telltales Indicators Shift Lever Status PRNDL 040973802 The EVIC displays are located in the center portion ofthe SEEDS ISIN Teens cluster and consists of eight sections Air Suspension Status If Equipped AWD Status o N D OF Wu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 9 Selectable Gauge 2 10 Selectable Gauge 1 T
296. eling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds such as towing a trailer up a steep grade or in stop and go traffic during hot weather In these conditions torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear when climbing a grade or shifting to NEUTRAL 370 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE when stopped in heavy traffic can help to reduce this excess heat generation During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperatur
297. els to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 442 STARTING AND OPERATING EENENEEEEEEEEMMMMMEMEEEC NN DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the fo
298. emote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio CD or other valid audio source The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take t
299. en positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Front seat belts may incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occu pant energy during an impact event 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants All seat belt systems except driver s front center and second row center position include Automatic Lock ing Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt web bing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as
300. enoid plug in NOTE Always store the remote control in a protected clean dry area Rigging Techniques Various winching situations will require application of m other winching techniques These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging simply increasing pulling power or main taining a straight line pulling situation You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation Think safety at all times 464 STARTING AND OPERATING ME How To Change The Pulling Direction wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope A snatch block secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing the wire rope to be at 90 to wind properly onto the spooling drum Increasing Pulling Power In some cases you may find yourself needing more pulling power The use of snatch blocks increases me chanical advantage and that increases your pulling power 064000984 Change Pulling Directions All winching operations should have a straight line from the winch to the object being pulled This minimizes the Double Line 054000986 Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum and increases pu
301. enter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started 532 STARTING AND OPERATING ME VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distri
302. ential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 441 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving whe
303. equired Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 Ibs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 549 WARNING Continued Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Integrated Trailer Brake Module If Equipped Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod ule ITBM for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic EOH trailer brakes NOTE This module has been designed and verified GAIN Adjustment Button 2 GAIN Adjustment Button with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrau h 3 Manual Brake Control Lever lic systems Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM 057070422 550 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The user interface consists of the followin
304. er motor will continue to run but will automatically disen gage when the engine is running Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Start Keyless Enter N Go FOBIK is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button 1 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL 2 Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once 3 The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds 4 If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and
305. er reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section to select a lower gear range Under these conditions using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing
306. er time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignori
307. er use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle plate into the buckle until you hear a click N nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Latch Plate To Buckle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous das up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is You
308. ergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a 572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat WARNING from the engine cooling system You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from y
309. ermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every one second The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Continued the windshield during freezing weather warm the depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is re leased To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range
310. ers etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle s battery is discharged see Manual Park Release or Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Dam age to your vehicle may result from improper towing Two Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmis sion is operable the vehicle may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km for 6 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for 6 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly or when using a sui
311. es after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is n
312. es sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9 1 1 Call system capabilities 9 1 1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9 1 1 system calls If the 9 1 1 Call system detects a malfunction any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected and at the beginning of each ignition cycle The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9 1 1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red The Phone Screen will display the following message Vehicle phone requires service Please contact your dealer and e An In Vehicle Audio message will state Vehicle phone requires service Please contact your dealer WARNING Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you will not have 9 1 1 Call services If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the 9 1 1 Call system immediately The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated have an authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately Even if the 9 1 1 Call system is fully functional factors beyond Chrysler Group LLC s control may prevent or stop the 9 1 1 Call system operation These include but are not limited to the following factors The ignition key has been removed from the ignition and the delayed accessories mode is active 80 THING
313. ff Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609 nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol lowing chart Type Stud Hex Size Torque Torque Nut Size Ft Lbs Newton Meters Cone M14 x 1 5 22mm 120 140 160 190 Flanged M14 x 1 5 22mm 130 160 175 215 610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 8 Stud Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted and center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer
314. fresh air and high blower setting This will tioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the water to get into the power distribution center and possibility of compressor damage when the system is possibly result in an electrical system failure started again REPLACEMENT BULBS When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base result in a dangerous electrical system overload If Aluminum base bulbs are not approved a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Interior Bulbs Bulb Number VEHICLE STORAGE Overhead Console TS 212 9 If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we Lamps recommend that you take the following steps to mini Dome Lamp 7679 mize the drain on your vehicle s battery For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for Disconnect the negative cable from battery replacement instructions ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 679 Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Bulb Number Projector Headlamp High Beam Base Quad Headlamp H11 Low Beam Base Quad Headlamp 9005 High Beam Front Turn Signal Lamp 3157NA Base Quad Headlamp Premium Bi Halogen HIR2 Projector
315. ft four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 WARNING Continued allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and
316. fting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling it toward you after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e It is danger
317. g Manual Brake Control Lever Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes The trailer and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on pressing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be displayed If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module ITBM the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash GAIN Adjustment Buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing condi tions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weat
318. g the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and SER RECEN gt o vehicle interior is very e mode Control to P on and blower on high Roll down the windows tor a minute to flush out the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls tor comfort e ial Cool amp Humid conditions e 6 Set the mode control to q and turn on it Go tt 6 6 46 to keep windows clear e Set the mode control to the position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS E STARTING PROCEDURES 342 Normal Starting eR ws 342 Automatic Transmission ls 342 Keyless Enter N Go 00 343 Normal Starting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 006 343 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 0 4 345 O If Engine Fails To Start 00 345 After Starting 6 6 angi eee 346 ll STOP START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 346 Automatic Mode 0 0 0 0 00008 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTO STOP tessa Gb gt detente reo teas hw tees To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop System To Manually Turn On The Start Stop System
319. g the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission shifter Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go if equipped in the ACC or ON RUN position A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission shifter to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position and the shifter is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys
320. ge Bins Locking And Unlocking RamBox RamBox Safety Warning Bed Extender If Equipped 223 224 224 224 225 225 Bed Rail Tie Down System SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications EASY OFF TAILGATE Disconnecting the Rear Camera or Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped Removing The Tailgate TRI FOLD TONNEAU COVER IF EQUIPPED Locking Tailgate Tri Fold Tonneau Cover If Equipped Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Removal Tri Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And Cleaning ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting The mirror head can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
321. ge continues to appear see an autho rized dealer If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED appears in the EVIC see your authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense amp System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 e e e ParkSense when on will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an
322. ge will appear in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information The system will need to be checked by your authorized dealer ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord 1500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly It is located between the front grill and the radiator but underneath the black upper seal 2500 3500 Models The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap It also has a c clip that is used for storage when not in use for the winter months During winter months remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c clip The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater CAUTION Continued e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electri
323. gine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 EVIC Green Telltales e Electronic Speed Control SET This telltale will illuminate green when the O electronic sp
324. gine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned
325. gnal And Backup Lamps Fog Lamps If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheetmetal 1 Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 683 Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far 3 Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard bulb socket side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap 4 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1 4 turn to post retainers in the outer box side panel unlock it from the housing 5 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket 684 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 6 Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Cargo Lamp 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown RM 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir ing harness to the body 073301014 1 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 685 073301015 073301016 aa 3 Turn the desired bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove the CAUTION socket and bulb from housing Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will res
326. h the Malfunction Indicator 4 Turn Signal Indicators Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic when the turn signal lever is operated Continued es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 NOTE A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at a rapid rate 5 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical sys tem should be serviced NOTE The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for several minutes and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize 6 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the br
327. he RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button or insert a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition switch The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position
328. he following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating th
329. he main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropri
330. he parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off Non EVIC Equipped Vehicles If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine OFF and the vehicle in PARK with the wheels straight ee STARTING AND OPERATING 475 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running and the brake applied rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESC Off switch four times within 20 seconds The ESC Off Indicator Light should appear and disappear four times 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Off Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re enable HSA functionality EVIC Equipped Vehicles HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC equipped vehicle If you wish to turn off the HSA feature refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Electronic Stability Control ESC If Equipped The ESC system enhances directional control and stabil ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or unders
331. he rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed It connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin ee STARTING AND OPERATING 539 Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight Hitch Type Max Trailer Hitch Max Trailer Weight 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg Class III Bumper Hitch 1500 Model Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight Class IV 1500 11 000 Ibs 4989 kg Model Class V 2500 3500 Models Fifth Wheel 2500 3500 Models Gooseneck 2500 Model Gooseneck 3500 Model Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drive train 17 000 Ibs 7711 kg 25 000 Ibs 11339 kg 20 000 Ibs 9071 kg 35 000 Ibs 15875 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 540 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight
332. he shift lever position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Sys tem in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK column shift only The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section Pressing the ERS switches column shift or moving the shift lever to the left or right console shift while in the DRIVE position will select the hig
333. he top tether anchorages are located behind each rear seating position There is a plastic cover over each an chorage To attach the tether strap of the child restraint 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor 112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint You may need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and be tween its posts 3 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting WARNING Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or Continued E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING Continued a EE younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Qu
334. heels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Auto Range This range sends power to the rear wheels The four wheel dr
335. her ee STARTING AND OPERATING 551 Adjusting GAIN NOTE This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h ie Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly ad justed See your trailer dealer if necessary Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec tions according to the trailer manufacturer s instruc tions When a trailer with electric EOH brakes is plugged in the trailer connected message should appear in the EVIC if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM braking functions will not be available the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the EVIC options 4 Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until VEHICLE SETTINGS appears on the screen Press the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter VEHICLE SETTINGS Press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen NOTE 1500 Models Only Light Electric and Heavy Electric will only be available due to the tow capacities of the vehicle 7 Press the RIGHT arrow and then press the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual brake control lever com pletely 552 STARTING A
336. hest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 8 2 1 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if itis not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever clockwise without first pulling it toward you
337. het id exea MeEGG 3X E PATa s 521 Adding eese Ra 530 Additives cles 524 Clean AE suat zx Ree edere aes ope d ENS 522 Ethanol segget ba Pw alk Bawden OR C wave uus 522 Filler Cap Gas Cap cxx em re etes 581 Gasolifi z ess sk Ed dp kod Meech regie aca s 521 Materials Added 00 524 Methanol vane ams o e aed eG ed 522 Octane Rating sas erita ees bey ed as 521 Requiremerits 4 aces ace kei cbe Ron A e hs 521 Tank Capacity ia seag mice sa aa mia Rh e 689 Fuel Hexible llle 526 Fuel System Caution 00 00 00 cee eee 530 FUSES us od og weder agio eaa dcos a tede 668 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 20 531 Gasoline Clean Air 0 ee 522 Gasoline Fuel leeren 521 Gasoline Reformulated llis 522 Gauges speedometer so sucsceucs d Rok RE ee eas le 262 Tachometer se ce rem b ed e enis 257 Gear Ranges ges debe e RA ROS Re re eld EROR ed 365 10 720 INDEX ME Gear Select Lever Override 618 General Information llle 20 Glass Cleaning 59v du eR E degs 666 Grocery Bag Retainer llle 224 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 535 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 534 Guide Body Bulders sasa ressesie 00000000 6 GVWR ee So faite fanart aaa ce 532 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water c i sees o e 442 Hazard Warning Flasher ills sss 571 Feats
338. hicle If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies repl
339. hicle must be completely stopped 3 The transmission Gear Selector must be in Drive and the brake pedal depressed The engine will shut down the tachometer will move to the zero position and the stop start telltale will illumi nate indicating you are in an Autostop While in an Autostop the Climate Controls system may automati cally adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTO STOP Prior to engine shut down the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled In following situations the engine will not stop e Driver s seat belt is not buckled e Driver s door is not closed e Outside temperature is less than 1 F 17 C or greater than 104 F 40 C The vehicle is on a steep grade Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept able cabin temperature has not been achieved 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed Engine has not reached normal operating temperature Battery discharged e The transmission is not in DRIVE e Hood is open e Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include fuel level accelerator pedal input engine temp too high and steering angle It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP START system g
340. his is the correct way to tether two outboard child seats 022670232 Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop 116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Center Seat 2 Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the right or left outboard seat 1 Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop 3 Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether strap loop 022670238 Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117 a Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And 4 Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop see Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop diagram Tighten the tether strap according to the Installing Three Child Restraints child seat manufacturer s instructions 1 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat Route the tether straps following the directions for right and left seating positions above 118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Attach bo
341. hissing noises from the hydro boost system during hard braking conditions 470 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Under cold temperatures pedal effort will be NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches during hard braking maneuvers operating temperature WARNING e ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Stability Control ESC and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of the systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must Anti Lock Brake System ABS never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system cont
342. i i i i i HEATED i q EI Ju IS de 18 t jor S p TEM ique B ub i i g i i i 3 i JE i Li H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O Po T ein E a Ed i i l E 3 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION EE WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders Refer to the Warranty Information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to www dodg
343. ic with Gasoline Engine For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supple ment We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 693 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case BW44 44 Only We recommend you use MOPAR BW44 44 Transfer Case Fluid Front Axle 1500 Four Wheel Drive Models We recommend you use MOPAR GL 5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 85 Rear Axle 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lu bricant SAE 75W 140 MS 8985 Limited Slip Rear Ax les require the addition of 5 oz 148 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive MS 10111 Front and Rear Axle 2500 3500 Models We recommend you use Synthetic GL 5 SAE 75W 90 Limited Slip 10 5 11 5 inch Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steering Reservoir 2500 3500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 696 Maintenance Chart 0000 697 M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E
344. icated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing out A 6 AK Jack Warning Label locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Placement of the jack 4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581 4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator 4X2 Front Jacking Location When changing a front wheel place the scissor jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below 582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm y LAX 060573855 4X4 Front Jacking Location 4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location 060573854 Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel 4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator wrench The tube extension may be used but is not When changing a front wheel place the scissor jack required under the rear por
345. icator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 13 Cargo Light If Equipped The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo Cs light is activated by pressing the cargo light button on the headlight switch 14 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 15 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 16 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 1 Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on
346. icle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because top gear is disabled and the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not en gaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold This is normal Using the Elec tronic Range Select ERS shift control when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven for several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ME cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine Six Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models Only The shift lever position display located in the inst
347. ide in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window S
348. ifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock The radiator drain cock is located in the lower radiator tank If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant expan sion bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant
349. in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the plugged in long enough without engine operation engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to battery degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 616 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the en gine NOTE For trucks equipped with 8 speed automatic transmission shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph or less CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free
350. in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision
351. inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the Continued 500 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 501 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure e Distance driven Performance tires
352. information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h CAUTION Do not use 4L Low range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement Driveline hardware dam age can result Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case 2H To 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing
353. inspected by an authorized dealer 3 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain CAUTION Continued on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come converter damage and Power loss will soon occur on during starting have the condition investigated Immediate service is required promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving wit
354. ion How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that
355. ion and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning Airing Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and vehicles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 CAUTION Continued pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at s
356. ion fluid and filter s as specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing 6 speed automatic only Tow Haul Mode To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS switches on more severe grades Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 557 Air Conditioning WARNING Turn off temporarily Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should Air Suspension System not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli To
357. ir bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF 9 1 1 Call Operating Instructions
358. ire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 496 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire or original equipment vehicl
359. ires If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by burying it Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable 438 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Placing something over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks Next place the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle as you power the winch in Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle Do not try to guide the cable into the drum If it starts to bunch up on one end let it You can re spool the cable after wards Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching WARNING Winch cables are under high tension when in use and can become a projectile if they fail Never stand over or straddle the winch cable Never jerk or overload the winch cable Never stand in front of the vehicle while winching Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious or fatal injury mE STARTING AND OPERATING 439 After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away a
360. isabled to improve rear view viewing asset 94 4 030471113 Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror 030405626 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manu CAUTION ally folded both forward and rearward to prevent dam age It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location rs UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped If equipped with power folding mirrors they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L left and R right Press the switch once and
361. istance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low Range with the transmission in first gear manually select first gear on automatic transmissions and pro ceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured or killed Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down E STARTING AND OPERATING 431 WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make i
362. it upright in the center of the seat with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Continued Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Continued In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front center
363. itored by the TPMS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 513 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE PRESSURE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and ram TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of an
364. its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 706 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 866 726 4636 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Ph
365. ivated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Ist Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in th
366. ive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663 CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle 664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Wheel And
367. ive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive Locks the front and rear drive shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel Transfer Case Switch Five Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2WD Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neut
368. jack near the jack turn screw 060601443 Jack And Tools Tied 4 Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn screw slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor 060573848 Jack And Tool Bag WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589 060573862 Jack Hold Down Fastener Jack And Tools 1500 Series NOTE Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold WARNING down location E 060505827 After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving 5 Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan Reinstall the plastic cover Continued 590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Continued you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground CAUTION Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire un
369. k Some key Always Know Your Winch Take the time to fully points to remember when using your winch are read and understand the included Installation and Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching Techniques in order to understand your winch and the winching operation 1 Always take your time to assess the situation and plan your pull carefully 2 Always take your time when using a winch 3 Use the right equipment for the situation Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 CAUTION Continued 1 Inspect the winch winch mount and wire rope for damage Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear or damage Always inspect winch installation and wire rope condition before operating the winch Frayed kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced immediately Loose or damaged winch installation must be corrected immediately e Always be sure any element which can interfere with safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching e Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum wire rope and rigging e Inspect for cracks pinches frayed wires or loose connections Replace if damaged Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar through the rollers Watch and listen to Winch for proper snugness 2 Put on gloves 454 STARTING AND OPERATING 3 Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch drum rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
370. k of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack lowered 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the 6 Using the lug wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120 140 ft Ibs WARNING 160 190 N m torque for a flanged type wheel nut is 130 160 ft Ibs 175 215 N m t If in doubt about Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make E piod A de the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station the vehicle unstable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be
371. key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver HeatedlVentilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status tou
372. l components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657 For 1500 Model axles the fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole within 1 4 in 6 4 mm of edge of hole for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear axle For all 2500 3500 Model axles the fluid level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole on the 9 25 in front and 3 4 in x 1 4 in 19 mm 6 4 mm on 10 5 in rear axles The 11 5 in rear axle level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials 1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential require that 5 oz 148 ml MOPAR Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information The MOPAR Limited Slip Additive should be
373. le Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 469 WARNING Continued e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunc tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light if equipped during brake use 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system You may experience some clicking or
374. le Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units If Equipped The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The a
375. le for proper coolant selection 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service Le vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plu
376. le hit the pulling vehicle WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than two or three feet of slack in the strap More slack than this greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam age Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from a strapping or winching situation e Winching Refer To Winch Operation For Addi tional Information Winching is most commonly used in the following situations there is no support vehicle available a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle there is a high risk of environmen tal or vehicle damage or where nothing else seems to work A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow controlled manner This control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam age Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor point It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle s weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch s pulling force If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap If it is another vehicle then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front t
377. le in this condition damage could occur to the Key Fob or ignition module Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either e Jump Start the vehicle Charge the battery en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and push ignition button to place ignition in OFF position When leaving the vehicle always lock your ve hicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Key In
378. le when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module The EVIC will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is mal functioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE QUIRED message for as long as the vehicle is in RE VERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not oper ate It PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the igni tion If the messa
379. lling power Start by feeding out enough STARTING AND OPERATING 465 wire rope to free the winch hook Attach the hook to your vehicle s frame tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch block Disengage the clutch and using the snatch block pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit Secure to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain Attach the clevis shackle Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap chain being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost 466 STARTING AND OPERATING M If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will WARNING sd WARNING still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering Continued operation with reduced power steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others parking maneuvers Service should be obtained as soon as possible NOTE CAUTION Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end there is a p
380. llons 121 Liters 2500 3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 129 Liters 2500 3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons 132 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 3 6L Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 4 7L Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters 5 7L Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 5 7L Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W 30 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters For 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 690 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M U S Metric Cooling System 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze 14 Quarts 13 Liters Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula 4 7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze 14 Quarts 13 Liters Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula 5 7L Engine 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR 16 Quarts 15 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models We recommend you use 18 7 Quarts 174 Liters MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula 5 7L Engine 2500 3500 Models w Heavy Duty We recommend 19 2 Quarts 18 2 Liters you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile For mula ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 691 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part We recommend you use
381. llowing Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warning before doing so Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 443 CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further da
382. lop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shifter control has only PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS switches described later in this section Pressing the GEAR GEAR switches on the steering wheel while in the DRIVE position will select the highest 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 051269900 Electronic Transmission Shifter Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK As an
383. lower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Is there an anchor point to winch to Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery then nothing can do the job better than a winch If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicl
384. lowing precautions should be observed Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph 24 km h At higher speeds operate in 4H Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 561 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF Two Wheel Four Wheel Drive Models The Ground Drive Models Flat Tow NONE NOT See Instructions ALLOWED e Automatic transmission in PARK e Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT NOT ALLOWED ALLOWED Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK 562 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE NOTE Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be lowered to the Entry Exit lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Air Suspension If Equipped for more information If the vehicle cannot be lowered to the Entry Exit level for example engine will not run tie downs must be fas
385. lows full pedal travel ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL e Further small adjustments may be necessary to find When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over the best possible seat pedal position accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 50 km h CAUTION The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals right side of the steering wheel or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path Electronic Speed Control Switches 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Contr
386. ludes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth and sixth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to activate TOW ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been ram included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A
387. ly with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire WARNING Using tires of different size and type M S Snow between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision E STARTING AND OPERATING 505 These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains NOTE e e e On 4x2 and 4x4 1500 model trucks the use of class S snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with P265 70R17 tires On 4x2 2500 model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with LT245 70R17 or LI265 70R17 tires On 4x4 2500 model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 or LT285 70R17 tires On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheel model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with LT265 70R17 tires e On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 DRW Dual Rear Wheel model trucks the use of class U snow chains is permitt
388. m the Uconnect Touch System if available Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features or Uconnect Touch Settings if available in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense amp Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and or right rear regions based on the object s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an object is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show a single solid arc in the left and or right rear region and the system will produce a tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1 2 second tone to slow to fast to continuous 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 032771343 032771342 Single 1 2 Second Tone Slow Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 032771
389. mage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you 444 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago nally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain
390. matic Transmission sun 342 Cold Weather epeari s a e RR 345 Engine Fails to Start llle 345 Remote 222adc emere RR Rees ee Be NOD dS 31 Starting Procedures Gas Engines 342 Steering POWER c got Sse edem eoe EORR GERE AEG 465 Wheel Heated seen 177 Wheel Tilt ciam x See eee REED 176 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 312 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls Storage Compartment Center Seat 728 INDEX eee Storage Vehicles a e sss deni meh s 332 Storing Your Vehicles anc a ss arem ERE ed 678 Sun ROO Dem be deta bd ia ee ES 205 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 503 Suspension ATE cie res eie ekaa ex eed 410 Sway Control Trailer llle 481 Synthetic Engine Oil i1 5s ess ee e nd 639 System Remote Starting 000 31 Tachometer 0 0 ce ee ee 257 Tailgate PR 245 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 325 Tilt Steering Column 00000000005 176 Tip Start csc tes de be Ge e 9 eR rg 343 Tire and Loading Information Placard 488 Tire Markings i sss Ren 482 TIRGS sor erp enr aded adt aaa aang 124 Aging Life of Tires 0 0 0 0 eas as 501 Air Pressure 0 0 00000 cee eee eee ees 493 CAINS eos ae CETT ean ree Sheed aoe Bete ea 504 Compact Spare i iad teaku sa s Vrae dU ewe 498 Dual seee lacus eg Oa 507 General Information 000 00 ee 493 High Speed ov es
391. may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display To change the Park Assist status touch and release Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park
392. ment Button Rear Head Restraints The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head re straints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Adjustment Button NOTE e The rear center head restraint Crew Cab and Quad Cab has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE trans mitters One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
393. mes each press will raise the requested level by one position up to a maxi mum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions i e vehicle speed etc 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Pressing the DOWN button once will move the sus pension one position lower from the current level as suming all conditions are met ie key in ON RUN position engine running doors closed speed below threshold etc The DOWN button can be pressed multiple times each press will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Entry Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current condi tions i e vehicle speed etc Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height The indicator lamps and EVIC messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes e Off Road 2 OR2 Indicator lamps 3 4 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2 e Off Road 1 ORI Indicator lamps 3 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in ORI Normal Ride Height NRH Aero Mode Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position e Entry Exit Mode Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode Entry Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph 53 km h If vehicle speed is reduced to and kept below 15 mph 24 km h indicator lamp 4 will flash and indica
394. mfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Quad Cab Crew Cab Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Bel
395. miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle 120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously not interpreted as an indication of difficulty injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFEDEqieS vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
396. minate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion is a small fan that draws air from the passenger compartment and pulls the air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls as well as soft keys located in the radio screen Th
397. more information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e For personal security and safety in the event of an collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking Door Lock Knob brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving without lifting the lock knob the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle 021870064 Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed Continued 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should
398. mperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or Ce high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if these modes are selected UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 Automatic Climate Controls With Touch Screen Soft Keys If Equipped Hard Keys Soft keys are accessible on the radio touch screen The hard keys located below the radio touch screen p AUTO J FRONT Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys 0456003153 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys 045674362 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will ca
399. n Canada e doicebepe AKER Saree SHES HHS ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 704 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades oesi aceae aS an aea 711 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 711 Tread Weal ri oa eec exe rr SEE Six 711 Temperature Grades ooon llle 712 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 705 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealer you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and
400. n present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARQ engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engin
401. n reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle trailer or other property WARNING Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stop ping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 554 STARTING AND OPERATING The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrati
402. n the instrument cluster and maintain that gear as the top available gear Once in ERS mode tapping the GEAR or GEAR switch will change the top available gear GEAR 2 GEAR ON OFF CANCEL 051269899 1 ERS Switch 2 ERS Switch To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the GEAR switch until D is once again displayed in the transmis sion gear position indicator in the instrument cluster ee STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury When to Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to activate TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting mJ 050170421 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Six Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1500 Models Only T
403. nce Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and Siri usXM Setup NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been se lected Once the setting is complete either press the Back Arrow soft key or the Back hard key to return to the 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select
404. nce See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Select Automatic High Beams ON through the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation 2 Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO A position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position Refer to Multifunction Lever in this section for further infor mation NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph 40 km h To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam system 1 Select Automatic High Beams OFF through the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation 2 Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position 3 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO A to the on position 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Parking Lights And Panel Lights D To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on
405. nch or other 5 Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 060673852 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597 Preparations 5 Turn the ignition OFF 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off Ww rear wheel the road to avoid the danger of being hit when usdids operating the jack or changing the wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the veludie 1 being jacked 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position 598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Jack Instructions 2500 3500 Series WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in
406. nd Backup Level gaia ee tie ees i ged ead Gee pee EE ded 656 L mps essere aes cae was oe 683 Transfer Case ck use e eed 656 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Automatic Transmission 659 Cargo Lamp 1 6 eee 684 Appearance Care And Protection From Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 686 COrfOSIOfl 3 cuore reme wee aed 662 Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels Ia FUSES otc ooi s perma 669 If Equipped s essetis RR RR RR 687 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER 669 Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If M VEHICLE STORAGE 00000000000 es ie ae ene aa i B FLUID CAPACITIES 4 nat te pet 689 M REPLACEMENT BULBS 679 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629 ll FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARIS guran aed aR ites ee eed 691 630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Battery 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Power Distribution Center Fuses 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L 071371417 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Power Distribution Center Fuses 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 10 Engine Coola
407. nd have your vehicle ready when you need it e e e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary 440 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The limited slip differ
408. necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts To Stow The Flat Or Spare NOTE Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 1 Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve nience in checking the spare tire inflation Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel 060573853 2 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening 060573852 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605 060573851 060573850 4 Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the the jack extension tube o
409. next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Tire Jack Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated e Transport Mode When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing Touch the box next to your selection and a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 e Wheel Alignment Mode Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled Refer to your authorized dealer for further information SiriusXM Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Subscription Information New vehicle purcha
410. ng Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury or death NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position Continue
411. ng column Using the screwdriver or similar tool push the Manual Park Release lever locking tab just below the middle of the lever to the right While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward until it locks in place pointing towards the driver s seat Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the released position Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle To Reset The Manual Park Release 1 Push the locking tab to the right to unlock the lever 2 Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever 3 Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position 4 Re install the access cover EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 623 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the trans mission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section NOTE Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be lowered to the Park lowest level and have automatic leveling disabled before tying them down from the body on a trailer or flatbed truck Refer to Air Suspen sion in Starting and Oper
412. ng engine coolant antifreeze types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage Drain flush and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or
413. ng the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehic
414. ng the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in STARTING AND OPERATING This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons NOTE Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect settings in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm e The vehicles theft alarm can be armed disarmed by pressing the passive entry key fob lock unlock buttons if equipped To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within
415. nic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 20 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Menu The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 21 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol ESC is off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 22 TOWIHAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the center stack upper switch bank This light will illumi nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected 23 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped tw The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ee Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the pro
416. nly Use of an air wrench or other vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch power tools is not recommended and can damage the mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot winch be overtightened Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place 606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Reinstalling The Jack And Tools 2500 And 3500 Series 1 Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug 2 Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn screw Snap tools into bracket assembly clips Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jack turn screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket assembly 060574343 Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly 3 Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn screw slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607 Jack Hold Down Fastener Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series NOTE Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped slides into the front hold down location The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle 4 Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan off the ground Reinstall the plastic cover 608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se
417. not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Electronic Range Select ERS Operation 8 Speed Transmission The Electronic Range Select ERS switches allow the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE For example if you shift the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will not 362 STARTING AND OPERATING shift above third gear except to prevent engine over speed but will shift down into second and first gears normally You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed When the shifter control is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between all available gears Tapping the GEAR switch on the steering wheel will activate ERS mode display the current gear i
418. ns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is cr high If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the en
419. ns sea eeeas 150 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 21 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 691 Sentry Key Immobilizer 18 Sentry Key Programming 0 4 20 Sentry Key Replacement 04 19 Service Assistance ss aces CSAS ea ER oq ceca 705 Service Contract hs ee oan uit Bae ean kik Reges 707 en INDEX 727 Service Manuals siess taeae kasiate eee eee 710 Settings Personal eds Soa ated drca 285 Shif ng sod Eee ee ee y Sh EIER b RS 352 Automatic Transmission 355 Transter Gases 2 sg ROPA MP Ta e ee dc e 389 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N CC I TTL 567 Shift Lever Override lees 618 Shoulder Belts 426i ehe eu e E 51 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 59 Side Airbag cc ae Sea erg a ERA Y WV 75 Signals TUT 1 eue tates E CR SUR Ug Race pu 124 Sliding Rear Window PoWet z cigceg wk RN pF Galea ee EY x 226 SmiartDeatnis ua acted s e a0 MO RC do fud 164 Snow Chains Tire Chains 0 504 SNOW POWs ies kyes ue Uk Beare diay SA ay erue 557 SNOW TifeSou oe oh ape x Reden Pa eae RS P dex d 497 Spare Ire sorasa f grad dns ap Beis ane dog elds i ed 498 Spark Pl gs 4c rere re ER sd 691 Speed Control Cruise Control 180 SpeedomMetete cakes doo awe bx RE PAP ig 262 Stabilizer Sway Bar System 419 DATING iat ee d Ru a ees Pd per eb BS eS 31 Auto
420. nt Reservoir 632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L 071405704 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Power Distribution Center Fuses 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2500 3500 Models Only 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
421. nter of the AWD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD 4LOW and 4WD AUTO are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case posi tion the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warni
422. nue these alerts until it successfully lowers For easy entry and loading your vehicle can be lowered by pressing the Key Fob air suspen The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to lower remotely The vehicle must not already be in Entry Exit Park ride height The vehicle battery must be fully charged All doors must be closed The ignition key must be out of the vehicle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Cancelling Remote Lowering Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime When vehicle lowering is can celled the vehicle will raise up to the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature until the ignition has been cycled ON OFF To cancel vehicle lowering press the Key Fob air suspen sion lowering button one time during the lowering process When vehicle lowering is cancelled the horn will chirp two times and the hazard lights will flash four times Once raising is completed the horn will chirp one time NOTE For further information refer to Air Suspension System in STARTING AND OPERATING Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardou
423. o the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Lights with Remote Lower If Equipped When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lower feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Trailer Select When this feature is selected the Trailer Type can be selected between Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 and Trailer 4 To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Trailer Brake Type When this feature is selected the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH and Heavy EOH To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Refer to Integrated Trailer Brake Module in Starting And O
424. o the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the WARNING negative post of the booster battery Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of plosion the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615 WARNING 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster spected at your authorized dealer battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged CAUTION battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables
425. oads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 545 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the CAUTION trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In or other parts could be damaged formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a ther information trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive the heavier loads train components the following guidelines are r
426. obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the instrument cluster On vehicles equipped with a tailgate ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians
427. of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of Continued windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the first detent and release The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2
428. off roading use only where maximum ground clearance is re quired To enter OR2 press the Up button twice from the NRH position or once from the ORI position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph 32 km h While in OR2 if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph 40 km h the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to ORI Off Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle payload an EVIC message will be displayed when this occurs Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting be aware of your surroundings you may not have the clearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam age may occur Aero Mode Lowers the vehicle approximately 6 in 15 mm 1500 Models Only This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle The 412 STARTING AND OPERATING ME vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph 100 km h and 66 mph 106 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph 106 km h The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains between 30 mph 48 km h and 35 mph 56 km h for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph 48 km h NOTE Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC or in the Uconnect Access 8 4
429. oing into a STOP START READY state under more extreme condi tions of the items listed above To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode While in DRIVE the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed The transmission will automatically reengage upon engine restart During this transition the brakes will hold the vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement Conditions that will cause the engine to start automati cally while in Autostop mode The Engine Will Start Automatically When e The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to REVERSE or NEUTRAL To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC settings e HVAC is set to full defrost mode e Autostop time exceeds 5 minutes Battery voltage drops too low ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 e Low brake vacuum e g after several brake pedal applications e STOP START OFF switch is pressed e 4WD system is put into 4LO mode e The emissions system requires it e A STOP START system error occurs Conditions that force an automatic shift to PARK while in Autostop mode The Engine Will Not Start Automatically and the Trans mission will be placed in PARK if The driver door is open and brake pedal released The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is unbuckled The engine hood has been opened e A STOP START system error occurs The engine may then be restarted by moving the trans mission shift selector out of PARK e g to
430. oise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped Use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling press the desired position on the transfer case control switch 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear 408 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Alternate Procedure T 2 Bring the vehicle to complete stop With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Press the desired position on the transfer case control switch After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition
431. ol system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h ee UNDE
432. old or who 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of WARNING their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for e Improper installation can lead to failure of an as long as possible up to the highest weight or height infant or child restraint It could come loose in a allowed by the child seat collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt co
433. omentum e Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Range if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control e Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use 4L Low Range with a gear low enough to maintain your momentum without shifting If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck e Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full ti
434. on may be used but is not required 060609051 4x2 Front Jacking Location 4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location For 2500 and 3500 4x4 series trucks when changing the front wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601 jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the drive tubes extending to the front Connect the jack tube axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the extension and wheel wrench drive tubes extending to the rear 060609050 060609073 4x4 Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location All 4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the 602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off On single rear wheel SRW trucks install the spare wheel Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts nuts toward the wheel On 3500 dual rear wheel and adjust the jack position as required models DRW the wheel nuts are a two piece assem bly with a flat face Lightly tighten the wheel nuts To NOTE If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the avoid the ris
435. on on the GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle Vehicle Loading in this section 490 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle
436. on switch to the ON RUN position Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL t TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates program ming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN posi
437. one 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 707 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the m
438. ons 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground E 057003766 Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 7 a 9 o o 604 149 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes STARTING AND OPERATING 555 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing The transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing However if frequent shiftingdoes occur while in DRIVE select TOW HAUL mode or select a lower gear using the Electronic Range Select ERS switches NOTE Using TOW HAUL mode or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking 556 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low speeds 20 mph 32 km h or below holding your vehicle in first gear using the ERS switches can help to avoid transmission overheating If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the automatic trans miss
439. operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se START STOP OR ENGINE Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN NOTE For further information refer to Starting Proce dures in STARTING AND OPERATING Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi tion It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand
440. opi ee ea oes ea aang ae ae eas 680 Automali 22s ses Er ede RT AS 162 Cleaning scena a obra AER po eacus 665 High Beam saccos ale brat iesi enmana 172 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 172 PASSING sud ea ere sor ee rr ep SE PE 172 SWI eee M MET PIENE 162 Head Restraints 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 154 Heated Mirrors 0 0 0 0 cc ee 137 Heater iiu Ob atn ERR Ra eee oe 315 Heater Engine Block 0 0 0 0 0 00220 351 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 172 Hitches Trailer Towing 1 6 eee eee 539 Hoistitig oeste free ye d etuer els 611 Hood Release eg REDE 160 Hub Caps odoceme ve oer Peer donee 590 TENIO s soniai aereas x ucro ep es RU OR oe atr des en 16 Key ciega ami Gp ce us Sois Histo aes died ids 12 Ignition Key Removal llle 16 Illuminated Entry 0 2 eee eee 22 Immobilizer Sentry Key 00445 18 Infant Restramt 4 sese e cer Y cha 84 Inflation Pressure Tires 2 0 2 0 00000005 503 en INDEX 721 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 131 Instrument Cluster llle 257 Instrument Panel and Controls 255 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 666 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls 549 Interior Appearance Care oein esdan mamisa 665 Interior Lights e 402i e t Ge dws 167 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 173 Introductions sess eaer yw RR E Maa ee d 4 Inverter Outlet 115
441. or on ice Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 498 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found
442. or or electrical system may occur WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or Positive Battery Post sparks away from the battery j 060809873 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the LUNA parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive 4 post of the discharged vehicle injury could result damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable t
443. or press the unlock button twice within five THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 seconds to unlock all doors the tailgate and the Ram Box if equipped The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while y
444. or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode SQ Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air Ce intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A LED will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause wind
445. ormation in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT Fuel Economy RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop Start status button until the Fuel Economy icon is Hy Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow Trailer Tow highlighted rmm Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow e Average Fuel Economy Miles Per Gallon MPG Bar button until the Trailer Tow icon is highlighted graph Press the SELECT RIGHT arrow button and the next screen will display the following e Range To Empty RTE trailer trip information e Current Miles Per Gallon MPG Trailer Trip e Trailer Brake ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Audio Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is high lighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to display the active source Screen Setup Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow SRE button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the EVIC Press and release the SELECT RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup sub menu The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed Stored Messages Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Mes sages XX displays highlighted in the EVIC If there is more than one message pressing the SELECT RIGHT button will display a stored warning message Press and release the UP and DOWN
446. orrect tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel 8 9 blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described Adjust the tire pressure when possible EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585 NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do 1 Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve nience in checking the spare tire inflation Slide the TO SOW The PATO pate wheel retainer through the center of the wheel NOTE Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately WARNING A loose
447. ot covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used NOTE For 2500 3500 trucks with a 5 7L engine operat ing under a gross combined weight rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg or greater SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded ca
448. ou are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
449. our radiator If CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500 SERIES TRUCKS WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573 WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacke
450. ous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi tion to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result
451. ously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 5 Trailer Sway Control TSC If Equipped The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro priate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for STARTING AND OPERATING 481 further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Off Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes TSC is only active in the default ESC On mode TSC can be disabled by pressing the ESC Off switch and entering ESC Partial Off mode It is not active in the ESC Parti
452. owever continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING
453. ows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection by pressing the A C button Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem perature Also make sure to select only Panel Bi Level or Floor modes Stop Start System If Equipped While in an Autostop the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition Air Conditioning Operation Push the A C button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A LED will illu minate when the A C system is engaged 045671422 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MAX A C For maximum cooling when MAX A C is selected the A C is turned on automatically and the air is recirculated NOTE A C cannot be deselected when in MAX A C position The LED will blink three times if the A C button is pushed Manual Climate Controls Wi
454. p Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil dren LATCH Restraint System for directions to attach a tether anchor 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different seating position es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111 Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Regular and Mega Cab Trucks In the regular cab truck the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and right passenger seats In the mega cab truck t
455. pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EE UE c EJ E 055703771 Tire Rotation STARTING AND OPERATING 507 Directional Tires If Equipped Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped For the R T package with 22 tires amp wheels tirerotation The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be must be performed with consideration of the tire rotation matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set direction The recommended rotation pattern for direc To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all tional tires is shown below four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires Sie poe M gt S S m C T T amp S 055710740 055740470 Tire Rotation Tire Rotation 508 STARTING AND OPERATING EMm CAUTION 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved direction of rotation This is to accommodate the asymmetrical design tread pattern of the On Off Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter OWL tires When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position on the truck For example if the spare is used to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished inward That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white writing of the OWL
456. pen Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance Entry Exit Watch For Clearance Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking And Tire Change Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height Stop Start Ready If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Hood Open If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Battery Charging If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Trailer Tow Haul Selected If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready 4WD Low Range Selected If Equipped e e e e e Stop Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Steep Incline If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Driver Door Open If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating If Equipped es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 e e e e e e e e e Stop Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Se lected If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned If Equipped Stop Start Autostop Active If Equipped Stop Start To Restart Press Clutch Or Shift To Neutral If Equipped
457. pen sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth clos
458. perating Trailer Name When this feature is selected the Trailer name can be selected from 16 names To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Odometer e 000 e 000 0 Upper Left e None e Compass Outside Temp default setting Trans Temp Oil Temp e Time Range To Empty RTE Average MPG es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Current MPG e Average MPG e Trip A Current MPG e Trip B e Trip A Trailer Trip distance only e Trip B e Trailer Brake Gain Trailer Trip distance only Upper Right e Trailer Brake Gain None Lower Left Compass default setting None default setting Outside Temp e Compass Trans Temp Outside Temp Oil Temp Trans Temp e Time Oil Temp e Range To Empty RTE e Time 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e e e e Range AVG MPG Current MPG Trailer Brake Gain Lower Right e e e None default setting Compass Outside Temp Trans Temp Oil Temp Time Range AVG MPG e Current MPG e Trailer Brake Gain Restore To Defaults Restores All Settings To Default Se
459. perating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation WINCH USAGE POWER WAGON ONLY IF EQUIPPED Things To Know Before Using Your Winch General Winch Information Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc tion By nature a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care Do not operate the winch without reading and understanding the com plete winch owner s manual Tensioning The Wire Rope The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use Follow the instructions below to tension the rope 1 Un spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum 446 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point CAUTION Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re quired to tension the wire rope 3 Apply at least 500 Ibs 227 kg of tension to the rope while winding the rope Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum CAUTION Wir
460. position with the tailgate closed e When in use all handles are to be in the locked Locking Tab position Bed Rail Tie Down System CAUTION The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 Ibs 113 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 038106531 Adjustable Cleats Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents along either rail in order to keep cargo properly secure To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut counterclockwise approximately three turns Then pull 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the detent and tighten the nut bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the rail 038106532 038106533 1 Utility Rail Detent 2 Cleat Retainer Nut Utility Rail End Cap 3 Utility Rail Cleat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To dete
461. procedure to check the transmission 7 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on fluid level properly 1 Monitor the transmission temperature using the EVIC display and operate the vehicle as required to reach the normal operating temperature Park the vehicle on level ground Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion allowing time for the transmission to fully en gage in each position ending with the lever in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated both sides The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature If the fluid level is low add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill Use ONLY the recommended fluid see Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts for fluid specifications After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level ee MA
462. pward or downward to help position the belt 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee away from your neck Press the button located on the upper belt guide and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING For Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab Only e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous Driver Center Passenger A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down First Row N A Cinch ALR and under the belt in a collision Second Row ALR Cinch ALR A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip N A Not Applicable bones In eithe
463. quipped When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the door locks are act
464. r damage secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy sharp objects with appropriate padding UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside Lever If Equipped the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark lever As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergenc y 5 BC SC attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha nism Bed Extender If Equipped A The bed extender has three functional positions e Storage Position e Divider Position e Extender Position Storage Position The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To install the bed extender into the storage position perform the following 1 Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates 036706565 Center Handle And Lock 1 Center Handle Lock 2 Handle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 2 With the side gates open position the extender fully 3 Rotate the side gates closed allowing th
465. r if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens 031406003 Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have Front Courtesy Reading Lights been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes 031471116 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ambient Light Cargo Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambientlight The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil button ity of the floor console area 031464207 MES Cargo Light Switch Ambient Light The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031464208 Turn Signal Lever NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate che
466. r outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 042363996 Power Outlets Center Stack 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Center console when equipped with bucket seats 034771465 Power Outlet Upper Lid Power Outlet Center Console Rear of the center console storage compartment Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment Quad Cab or Crew Cab if equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 All accessories connected to the outlet s should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle Power Outlet Rear Center Console e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply shock and failure power when the key is in the ON RUN or ACC posi tions 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery
467. r body could strike the inside surfaces of the too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in injury A belt worn under the arm can cause inter a collision nal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a colli sion e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack From Belt 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in a vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A fra
468. r case the risk of internal injuries is 4 AT R Automatic Locking Retractor greater Wear a lap belt low and snug For Standard Cab Only Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions au Driver Center Passenger The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Frot Nw N A ALR ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For Second Row N A N A N A additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child MEE Restraints section The chart below defines the type of ALR Automatic Locking Retactor feature for each seating position 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack
469. r the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light ee STARTING AND OPERATING 511 e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual
470. ra lt than one child restraint Please refer to Installing LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be E equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System tor Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Center Seat LATCH Quad Cab Mega CabG Crew Cab Split Bench If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position do not use that outboard position If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt do not install a child seat in that outboard position WARNING Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint Please refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here
471. rages Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion p 022632837 Quad Cab Mega Cab Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages 3 In addition Regular Cab models have tether 3i strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages lo cated behind each of the rear seats Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH Standard Cab Quad a Cab Crew Cab Full Bench Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position PT 1 oe WARNING Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting Behind Covers Never use the same lower to attach a
472. ral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button with a ballpoint pen or similar object located in the ce
473. re inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering 2500 3500 Models Only and transmission as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights EE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 697 Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System e Change oil and filter e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required e Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions Lube the front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 i 698 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MMM A A W Maintenance Chart N T Mileage or time passed o o o o o o o o 2 2 S 2 E whichever comes first S S S S S zi S S S S S S S S A amp 8 9 88 J SJ
474. re pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand using the appro priate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle s mo mentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the
475. re tires have the letter I or 5 molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in 404 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits ee STARTING AND OPERATING
476. reational Towing in Starting and Operating for further infor mation Shifting Procedure NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK Press the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to shift the transfer case Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momen tarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear n
477. rection of the switch Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release when the desired position has been reached the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull Em i upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous will move in the direction of the switch Release the Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of switch when the desired position is reached control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious directions Pull upward or push downward on the front injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat seat belt cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the switch when the desired position is reached shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt Reclining The Seatback which could result in serious injury or death The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
478. remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating 12V DC together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery and can provide power at all times NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPARG knob and element must be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 CAUTION The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Lower left and lower right of the center stack when equipped with a bench seat Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the powe
479. ress and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Key Fob Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the seat mounted switch To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will au
480. ressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 510 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized fo
481. riving in the light load condition as defined as two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 pounds 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label lo cated on the rear face of the driver door Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in an accident causing serious or fatal injury To switch back to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold press the tire light load inflation switch It is not necessary to first fill the tires to the max load inflation pressure cold values to switch the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold If after pressing the tire light load inflation switch and tire pressures are below the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light located in the instrument cluster will turn ON and a chime will sound An inflate to XX message will also be displayed The tire pressures are now re quired to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure cold values described on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar If the tire light load inflation switch LED turns OFF the TPMS has been reset and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds A text message Tire Pre
482. rmation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation Hn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED is 034171114 The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead Power Sunroof Switch console between the courtesy reading lights 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ses WARNING e Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not leave the key in the ignition switch or leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON Run position Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrap ment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an o
483. rmine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this impor tant document NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle an alternate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL must be provided EASY OFF TAILGATE To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or RKE the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Disconnecting the Rear Camera or Remote 2 Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press Keyless Entry If Equipped ing inward in the locking tab 1 Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or RKE connector bracket located on the rear sill 036906362 Locking Tab 3 Disconnect the chassis wiring harness ensuring the connector bracket does not fall into the sill Connector Bracket ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 4 Connect the chassis plug and bracket provided in the Removing The Tailgate glove box to the chassis wiring harness and insert the f 1 Di he wiring h for th n bracket back to the sill isconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and or power locks if equipped refer to Disconnecting 5 Connect the tailgate plug provided
484. rning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 NOTE Although BeltAlert amp has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use
485. roach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides 428 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to r
486. roblem with the power steering system of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle 054105820 Parking Brake Release When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 468 STARTING AND OPERAT
487. rols hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 Traction Control System TCS If Equipped The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slipping wheels to provide optimal forward trac tion Brake Assist System BAS If Equipped The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The
488. roplaning or peak traction characteristics INDEX 714 INDEX ME Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 649 Adding Fuels 22 rette ais Sea apes 530 Additives Fuel 0 0 0 0 0 00 cee ee eee 524 Adjustable Pedals amat amii aae aans 179 AIIDag sec uae e ded E eanne zs E EE edes 66 Airbag Deployment sbe ssnssi rass peade u ins 80 Airbag Eight se erodes tagia me ER 74 Airbag Maintenance llle 82 Airbag Side seseque Re EN ARES ARA 69 Airbag Window Side Curtain 70 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 640 Air Conditioner Maintenance sss 642 Air Conditioning 4 sae ye rM IA RE 315 Air Conditioning Controls llle 315 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 642 Air Conditioning System llle 315 Air Pressure Tires ee eee 494 Air SUSPENSION e seses aed Each etu e em dee d 410 Alarm Light i ox pee muet perennes quas 262 Alarm Panie dece OU asad aan a tegen e a CR ak 28 Alarm Security Alarmi sses sieas ania ak a 21 Alarm System Security Alarm 21 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antifreeze Engine Coolant lt s scies iilis 648 DiSposal iu Eb tami epi dra RU RR ded 651 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 0 470 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 257 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 21 Anti Theft System sellers 21 Appearance Care ic
489. roughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Manual Climate Controls Without Touch Screen If Equipped The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can iW Y be set to obtain desired interior conditions 4j 1 Front Blower 4 RECIRCULATION Control 2 Temperature Control 5 Air Conditioning A C 3 MODE Control 6 DEFROST Mode 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures Rotating the knob clock wise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures increases as you move the control 045671419 clockwise from the OFF position 045671420 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the
490. rument cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into RE VERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual down shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control refer to Electronic Range Select ERS Operation in this section Pressing the ERS switches on the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6 5 4 9 2 1 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shi
491. s Bracket Assembly Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly WARNING Turn the jack turn screw counterclockwise to release jack from bracket assembly After using the jack and tools always reinstall them in the original carrier and location While driving Continued 5904 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE T WARNING Continued you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Removing The Spare Tire 1 Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle Insert the tube through the access hole be tween the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube 060573849 EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595 2 Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable access to the spare tire retainer slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle 060573851 060573850 5906 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable 060573853 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wre
492. s of actuating the handle The seatback may swing control which could cause a collision and serious forward and hit you causing injury To avoid injury place your hand on the seatback and actuate the handle then position the seatback in the desired position injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped The seat is divided into three segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to On some models the back of the center portion 20 swing dump forward on manual recliner seats This easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage dump feature allows access to the storage bin behind compartment the seat Dump Feature Manual Recline Seat Only 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mega Cab Rear Seat Features Reclining Rear Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat j cushion To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position release the handle 7 030907362 Rear Seat Recliner Handle WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision
493. s on stable ground If you are able to drive the vehicle the winching operation is complete Using The Remote Control NOTE Avoid overheating the winch motor For extended winching stop at reasonable intervals to allow the winch motor to cool down e What to look for under load The wire rope must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum rotation decal on the winch As you power in make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the drum This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw ing into the inner wraps binding and damaging the wire rope Avoid shock loads by using the control switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum This stack can become large enough to cause serious damage to the winch So line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate To fix an uneven stack spool out that section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum which will free up space for continued winching 16 17 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 15 Secure vehicle Once recovery of the vehicle is com plete be sure to secure the vehicle s brakes and shift the transmission to PARK Release tension in the wire rope Disconnect the wire rope and disconnect from the anchor Re
494. s with a 60 40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor WARNING Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects stored on the load floor Unfolding The Load Floor may move around with force and strike occupants resulting in serious or fatal injury 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the load floor unfolds into position the Seat 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor 3 Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor Do not drive with the load floor in the up position When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor could move to the down position causing serious Load Floor In Open Position injury 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 PICKUP BOX The pickup box has many features designed for utility and convenience 036006530 Load Floor Securing Straps 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle Pick Up Box Features 1 Upper Load Floor Indents 2 Bulk Head Dividers 3 Cl
495. senger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107 Mega CabG Standard Cab What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg The Tether Anchor can be used with the seat belt until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt without the Tether Anchor once the combined weight is more than 65 Ibs 29 5 kg the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seat back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed No Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes In positions with cinching latch plates CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns Do not twist th
496. sers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U S residents only 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Uconnect amp RADIOS IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect radio refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Located inside the center console upper lid this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Access User s Manual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches Semi 045035190 R
497. severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Continued side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag is marked with an air bag label sewn into the Do not put anything on or around the air bag outboard side of the front seats covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc A 022610242 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags may provide front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB If Equipped 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to tha
498. shifted transfer case Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case located in this section for further informa tion Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equipped The transfer case provides four mode positions Two wheel drive high range 2H Four wheel drive high range 4H e Neutral N ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Four wheel drive low range 4L This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear drive shafts are locked together This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions a
499. similar object Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch below the rotary transfer case control knob The NEUTRAL N indi cator light will blink while the shift is in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL N is complete After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL N light stays on release the NEUTRAL N button Release the parking brake 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 566 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 8 10 11 12 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL Firmly apply the parking brake Turn OFF the engine For vehicles with Keyless Enter N Go press and hold the EN GINE START STOP button until the engine shuts off Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear NOT in Neutral On 8 speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position then cycle the key or the Keyless Enter N Go button to the RUN position and back to the OFF position Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 14 Release the parking brake NOTE With electronic shift transfer case
500. situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 478 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced e Trailer Sway control TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the Partial Off mode All Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD AUTO And 4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose The Following ESC Operating Mode This Is The Only ESC Operating Mode in 4WD LOW Full Off This mode is intended for off road use when ESC stabil ity features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESC Off switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESC Off Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message ee STARTING AND OPERATING 479 NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chim
501. sory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passengers and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The OR
502. ss may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available
503. ssure System Maximum Load Setting will also be displayed in the EVIC General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses MRXC4W4MA4 2546A CAWAMAA United States Canada STARTING AND OPERATING 521 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L And 4 7L Engine These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular ab pasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasoline having 522 STARTING AND OPERATING ME an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recom mends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine H
504. stem uses the Remote Keyless Entry C RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans mitter may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start m All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed HAZARD switch off BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed Fuel meets minimum requirement 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle e Vehide iheftalarminot active Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the WARNING vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in jury or death when inhaled e Remote Start
505. sulting in serious injury 060573848 Jack And Tool Bag 576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Removing The Spare Tire 2 Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable t Remove the spare tire oerore attempting to jack up the slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle Insert the tube through the access hole be tween the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube TTi 060573850 060573849 EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain 4 Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to access to the spare tire retainer tilt the retainer at the end of the cable 060573852 060573851 578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 5 Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel Preparations 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 060573853 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with adu i as the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other 4 Pla
506. swaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board A With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This sy
507. switch is not in the ON position then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing en STARTING AND OPERATING 409 Shifting Procedure NOTE e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case will flash until the transfer case completes the shift position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 410 STARTING AND OPERATING AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Description The air suspension system provides full time load level ing capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button MEMO UE have E NE o SN N P2 Air Suspension Switch 058171263 1 Up Button 2 Down Button 3 Entry Exit Mode Indicator Lamp Customer selectable
508. t is ON until all requirements have been met LOW The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing 051905843 Transfer Case Switch Five Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the AWD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch whichis Dwosuheel deme high range AWD located on the instrument panel Four wheel drive automatic range 4WD AUTO Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK 398 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of tra
509. t provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners if equipped and or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy The system includes side impact sensors if equipped that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any acces
510. t Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Standard Cab Mega Cab Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages
511. t a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case 388 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures WARNING You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional
512. t and fog light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep tible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Headlights To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight O switch clockwise to the headlight position When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate light and instru ment panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Ww Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position 031464204 Automatic Headlight Position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 NOTE The en
513. t into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause Continued 360 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the Electronic Range
514. t to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE Never back down a hill in NEU TRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ME avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want to use first gear in 4L Low Range and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the
515. table steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels 620 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL N and the transmis sion is in PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT in Neutral for manual transmissions Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed instructions CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll EN
516. teering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match 476 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position All Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD 4WD AUTO Or WD LOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESC Operating Modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD 4WD AUTO AWD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral back to 4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off or ESC Off for specific reasons as noted below WARNING Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can
517. tem BTSI that holds the transmission shifter in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 In 8 speed vehicles the brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds Eight Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art fuel efficient eight speed transmission The electronic shifter control is located on the instrument panel The transmis sion gear PRND is displayed both above the shifter control and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To select a gear range simply rotate the shifter control You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK see Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System You must also press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as Park to Drive simply rotate the shifter control to the appropriate detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will deve
518. tened to the axles not to the body Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and or cause loss of proper tie down tension Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Place automatic trans mission in PARK manual transmission in gear not in NEUTRAL 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 563 CAUTION Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission causing damage to internal parts Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models NOTE Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans fer c
519. tests can be performed e If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message p that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in If the vehicle diagnostic system determines 634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a
520. th Touch Screen If Equipped Hard Keys The hard keys are located below the radio touch screen Climate Controls Hard keys Soft Keys Soft keys are accessible on the radio touch screen 0456003147 Temperature Controls Soft keys UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 1 A C Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON Performing this function again will cause the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 4 Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster if equipped and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these ca
521. th hooks to the center tether strap loop but do not tighten the straps yet Place a child restraint on the center rear seat Route the tether strap following the directions for the center seating position above Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap T oo o 022670237 Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300
522. th the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 124 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid 2500 3500 4500 5500 Models Only or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS M MIRRORS ooh ch eh erpx Ex PXResa dx addi 131 Heated Mirrors If Equipped 137 mmm Inside Day Night Mirror 131 Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror It Equipped sc ice Sango Sis UR ah We ue 137 Automatic Dimming Mirror
523. the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings To change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchs
524. the left console shift will activate ERS mode display the current gear in the instrument cluster and maintain that 372 STARTING AND OPERATING gear as the top available gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever switch one time in the direction the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear Once in ERS mode tapping ERS 2 or will change the top available gear Column Shift Lever 051205603 STARTING AND OPERATING 373 WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left console shift or the ERS switch down column shift The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed Console Shift Lever down To exit ERS mode simply press and hold the shift lever to the right console shift or press the ERS switch column shift until D is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster 051205622 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an elec
525. the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H Or 4H To 4L With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transmission into NEUTRAL While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE e Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the transmission into NEUTRAL hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
526. ther details The RamBox storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key To lock and unlock Continued 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the storage bin insert the key into the keyhole on the RamBox Safety Warning pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock or counterclock wise to unlock Always return the key to the upright vertical position before removing the key from the pushbutton WARNING CAUTION Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before moving or driving vehicle Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching hinging mechanisms Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always close the storage bin covers when your vehicle is unattended Do not allow children to have access to the storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke In an accident serious injury could result if the storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle motion In order to minimize potential fo
527. til the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591 nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torques are shown in the fol lowing chart Type Stud Hex Size Torque Torque Nut Size Ft Lbs Newton Meters Cone M14 x 1 5 22mm 120 140 160 190 Flanged M14 x 1 5 22mm 130 160 175 215 SEHE RUE ARAE SERIES TRUCKS WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The WARNING vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a
528. ting be aware of your surroundings you may not have the clearance re quired for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur The system requires that the ignition be in ON RUN position or the engine running for all user requested changes When lowering the vehicle all of the doors must be closed If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door s is closed This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into on coming traffic When raising the vehicle the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front When lowering the vehicle the front will move down first and then the rear After the engine is turned off it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly this is normal The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance To assist with changing a spare tire the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio Refer to Uconnect Access Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARN
529. tinued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 030907365 Handle Rear Passenger Fold Flat Seats 2 Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seat is locked in place pE 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING An improperly latched seat could cause serious in jury or death Make sure that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust ment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Adjust
530. tion 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink amp button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in som
531. tion 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to SEATS EDI ai automated gar wasi Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror vehicle and can be adjusted separately WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Blindspot Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Driver s Power Seat If Equipped Some models may be equipped with an eight way power driver s seat The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat cushion There are two power seat switches that are used to control the move ment of the seat cushion and the seatback 030905752 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Seatback Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se move in the di
532. tion The speeds can be selected using either hard keys or soft keys as follows Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 7 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 8 Driver Temperature Controls Push the Up button for warmer temperature settings Push the Down button for cooler temperature settings On the touch screen slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings or slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 9 Passenger Temperature Controls Push the Up button for warmer temperature settings Push the Down button for cooler temperature settings On the touch screen slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow soft key for warmer temperature settings or slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft key for cooler temperature settings 10 AUTO Temperature Control Controls airflow temperature distribution volume and the amount of air recirculation automatically Press and release to select Refer
533. tion of the lower control arm as shown For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks when changing a rear wheel below assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583 drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the ECOSSE drive tubes extending to the rear Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 4 By rotating the lug wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the 0606065663 vehicle only enough to remove the tire Rear Jacking Location Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Using the lug wrench finish tightening the wheel nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct wheel nut tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120 140 ft Ibs 160 190 N m torque for a flanged type wheel nut is 130 160 ft Ibs 175 215 N m torque If in doubt about the c
534. tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors and TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings ram l The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will display in the EVIC and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicl
535. tires will maintain proper position TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 509 also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard p
536. tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced 055007576 tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire WARNING These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Continued 502 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
537. to Automatic Operation for more information Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes 11 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Operation 0456003153 Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Controls Soft keys 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas senger temperature hard or soft control buttons Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 The temperature can be displayed in
538. tomatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Air Suspension Display Alerts If Equipped When All is selected all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed When Warnings Only is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Aero Ride Height Mode 1500 Only If Equipped When this feature
539. ton once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter N Go 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Messages e Front Seatbelts Unbuckled e Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled e Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled e Service Airbag System e Traction Control Off e Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Antilock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off Cruise Ready Cruise Set To XXX MPH Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire s Inflate Tire to XX Service Tire Pressure System Parking Brake Engaged 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e e e e e e e e e Brake Fluid Low Service Electronic Braking System Engine Temperature Hot Battery Voltage Low Service Electronic Throttle Control Lights On Right Turn Signal Light Out Left Turn Signal Light Out Turn Signal On Vehicle Not in Park Key in Ignition Key in Ignition Lights On Remote Start Active Key to Run
540. tor lamp 3 will remain solid until Entry Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off Transport Mode No indicator lamps will be illumi nated Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle Tire Jack Mode indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated Tire Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Wheel Alignment Mode indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM 2500 MODELS ONLY IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front and rear differentials These differentials when engaged mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck The locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged during low speed extreme off road situa tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations CAUTION e Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced roads The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are locked on hard surfaced roads Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning You c
541. trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e e e e e e Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB if equipped Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Buckle Switch Seat Belt Pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors if equipped The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
542. tronically controlled Overdrive fourth and fifth gears The trans mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature the engine coolant antifreeze has reached an ad equate temperature e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch to activate TOW HAUL mode This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode transmission upshifts are delayed and the trans mission will automatically downshift for engine brak ing during steady braking maneuvers 050170421 TOW HAUL Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW HAUL mode has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation Normal operation is always the default at engine start up If TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your veh
543. ttings e Cancel e Okay Uconnect amp ACCESS SETTINGS The Uconnect Access system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located below the Uconnect amp Access system in the center of the instrument panel In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Your Uconnect Access system may also have a Screen Off and Back hard keys located below the system Press the Screen Off hard key to turn off the Uconnect Access screen Press the Screen Off hard key a second time to turn the screen on Press the Back hard key to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect Access system Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Access dis play Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Access 8 4 Settings Press the Apps soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Access system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assista
544. udgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire 424 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low Range When driving off road shift into 4L Low Range for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the lower gearing low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills with improved control and less effort Also use 4L Low Range in rain ice snow mud sand to get heavy loads rolling improve traction or whenever 4H High Range traction will not do the job Driving In Snow Mud And Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s m
545. uding babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured
546. uel Requirements 040 524 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 525 DALUNG acer cu a x We eant de aa a aes 525 Cruising Range exacts seamen a e 526 Replacement Parts Maintenance ADDING FUEL sigi sod aiaa DRE RR dias Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label TRAILER TOWING Common Towing Definitions Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight cscs eee ee aen yas Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight Towing Requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Towing lips m emm ees 552 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 557 EN SNOWPLOW sapei ceed nes yee RP ES 553 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive 1500 Models Only 553 Models i v e e s 559 2500 3500 Models Only 00 00 cece eee 554 Rec eanna Towing c LoubW hee Deve Models 55er reve ee eee 560 E RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC 000005 557 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt if equipped in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child The starter shoul
547. uire servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me components or negatively impact vehicle perfor chanic P 8 X MP P mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637 CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minut
548. ult 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 686 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp 073301017 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn and pull it from the lamp assembly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 687 N f 073301423 Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheels If 2 Turn the socket 14 turn counterclockwise to access the Equipped bulb 1 Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket to tne bulb sackets 4 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 688 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eee NN Side Marker Lamps Dual Rear Wheels If 1 Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly Equipped 2 Pull the entire assembly from the fender 3 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove from assembly to access the bulb 4 Pull the bulb straight out from socket 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 073301424 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 689 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 1500 Regular Cab Shortbed Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters 1500 Regular Cab Longbed Crew Quad Cab Models Optional 32 Ga
549. unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 056502429 E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 STARTING AND OPERATING 527 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame ES5 ETHANOL Fuel Requirements ram 056502433 Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of Eras Badge these two For best results a refueling pattern that Ethanol Fuel E 85 alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and avoided Tae maleada pasohne When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full 528 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least
550. ur vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference wi
551. use the A C operation to switch into manual mode and the A C indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 4 Defrost Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Continued CAUTION Continued e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 5 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be a
552. used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643 WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro
553. uspension Park Assist If Equipped 4 Hazard Switch 10 Instrument Panel Drawer 16 Parking Brake Release 5 Upper Glove Compartment 11 Climate Controls 6 Lower Glove Compartment 12 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040370063 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM x 1000 CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine operation over 3200 RPM Redline can result in significant damage that will not be covered under warranty 2 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light
554. utions can cause damage to the heating elements Continued CAUTION Continued e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 5 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demister outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode e Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and P loor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets
555. vehicle and have a collision REVERSE Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position CAUTION range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use this reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A periods with the engine running The engine may be Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift for further information the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle NEUTRAL ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec ond gears direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driv ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions To access all six available gears you must use the Electronic Range Select ERS shift control described below When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain trav
556. vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion CAUTION Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy e Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom con ditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and mak
557. vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times incl
558. vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued Continued 592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat Removal Of Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover located on the side of the front passengers seat To remove the cover pull the front part of the cover closest to the front of the seat toward you to release a locking tab Once the front of the cover is loose slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame 060505826 Jack Access Cover Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise remove the wing bolt and then slide the assembly out from under the seat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593 MT 060507579 060574343 mm Jack And Tools 2500 3500 Series Jack And Tool
559. vious setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system RKE Air Suspension Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle If Equipped P sion lowering button two times When Remote key FOB lowering is requested the vehicle will send a series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will conti
560. will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 491 NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 492 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and TOTAR FRONT REAR from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs Weight 865 Ibs af 195 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Is TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs minus 400 Ibs 465 Ibs B11a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 493 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating
561. wind the wire rope The person handling the wire rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand control the winch at all times 462 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING To prevent serious injury NEVER put your fingers inside the hook area as you are powering in NOTE How to spool under no load Arrange the re mote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered Tighten and straighten the layer if necessary Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope By pulsing the remote control switch STARTING AND OPERATING 463 18 Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow 19 Disconnect the remote control Disconnect the remote hook control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place Winching operations are now com plete Put the cap on the sol
562. witch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights AWD and 4LOW are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case position the indicator lights will do the following 392 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shi
563. y of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound 514 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings I The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE PRESSURE message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or in a different color An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed EXAMPLE ONLY Low Tire FSI 2345 mi Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the 055900259 EVIC will stop flashing or return to it s original color and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detecte
564. y one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your bank below the climate controls There are also soft keys Vehicle for further information in the radio screen that will activate the heated steering wheel WARNING Press the switch to turn on the heated e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin x steering wheel The light on the switch because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes will illuminate to indicate the steering spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus wheel heater is on Pressing the switch tion or other physical conditions must exercise a second time will turn off the heated care when using the steering wheel heater It may 031705828 steering wheel and light indicator cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat NOTE The engine must be running for the
565. y to cross a pool of water without stopping 24 inches deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph 16 km h and a pool of water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph 8 km h both with an entrance ramp angle of 1 3 degrees ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 CAUTION The door sill height is 25 inches Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultane ous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good j
566. y upright e Ina collision the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg 035305807 Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to Upper Storage Compartment raise the cover The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt With the upper lid closed pull on the lower handle to power outlet that can be used to power small electrical open the lower storage bin devices refer to Electrical Power Outlets for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury 035305808 Lower Storage Bin 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Second Row In Floor Storage Bin If Equipped To open in floor storage bin lift upward on the handle of In floor storage bins are located in front of the second eae en ape en row seats and can be used for extra storage The storage NOTE The front seat may have to be moved forward to bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for fully open the lid cleaning In Floor
567. yed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt etc or if the air bag deployed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the extra web E bing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue front seats 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab ba
568. you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Folding Rear Seat Table Mode If Equipped 2 Fold the seatback forward Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down A N and used as a table p To fold down either rear seatback 1 Lift the handle located next to the head restraint 030907364 Table Mode 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seatback is locked in place 030907363 Table Mode Handle 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat If Equipped WARNING Continued Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward Cargo must be securely tied down before driving when the seatback is folded flat your vehicle Improperly secured cargo can fly WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in To fold either rear seat flat these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed 1 Lift the handle located on the outboard side of either e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your of the rear seats vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly around in a sudden stop or collision and strike someone in the vehicle causing serious injury or death Con

2013 Ram Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents